You are on page 1of 353

TM-Editor 25.04.

2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 1

1 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1063 79 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

For a frequency of 200 KHZ, what is the wavelength

1500m

150m

1500km

150km

2 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 174 AviaExam130 5/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft departs from position A (04°10' S 178°22'W) and flies northward


following the meridian for 2950 NM. It then flies westward along the parallel of
latitude for 382 NM to position B.
The coordinates of position B are?

45°00'N 172°38'E

53°20'N 169°22W

45°00'N 169°22W

53°20'N 172°38'E

3 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 175 AviaExam131 5/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The angle between the true great-circle track and the true rhumb-line track
joining the following points: A (60° S 165° W) B (60° S 177° E), at the place of
departure A, is:

7.8°

15.6°

5.2°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 2

4 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1064 80 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The factors that determine the ranges available from the sky waves are:

Transmission power, diffraction, critical angle and angle of incidence.

Critical angle, refraction, angle of incidence and diffraction.

Transmission power, conductivity of earth's surface and angle of


incidence.

Transmission power, depth of penetration, critical angle and angle of


incidence.

5 21.2.5.3.3 propagation with the frequency bands Typ: MC 1048 AviaExam568 6/28/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In aviation, the reflection on ionosphere layers phenomenon is used in the


following frequencies:

HF

VHF

UHF

VLF

6 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1049 AviaExam570 6/28/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The wavelength of a radio transmitted on frequency 121.95 MHz is:

2.46 m

24.60 cm

2.46 cm

24.60 m
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 3

7 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1065 81 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Skip distance in relation to the sky wave is;

distance between the transmitter and the point of first return of the sky
wave on the surface.

distance between the receiver and the transmitter.

distance between the point of receiving the surface wave and the first
return of the sky wave, where no reception is possible.

distance between the point of receiving and the 1st sky wave return on
the surface.

8 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 176 AviaExam132 5/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: Waypoint 1. 60°S 030°W


Waypoint 2. 60°S 020°W
What will be the approximate latitude shown on the display unit of an inertial
navigation system at longitude 025°W?

060°06'S

060°11'S

059°49'S

060°00'S

9 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 177 AviaExam133 5/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the time required to travel along the parallel of latitude 60° N between
meridians 010° E and 030° W at a groundspeed of 480 kt?

2 HR 30 MIN

1 HR 15 MIN

1 HR 45 MIN

5 HR 00 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 4

10 62.1.2.0.6 factors affecting range Typ: MC 1066 82 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Night effect when using NDB may be minimized by;

using a high frequency NDB, avoid operation at dusk and dawn, use a
high powered NDB and utilise NDB's near the aircraft.

use a high frequency NDB, operate at dusk and dawn, use a low
powered NDB and utilise NDB's near the aircraft.

use a low frequency NDB, avoid operations at dusk and dawn, use a
high powered NDB and utilise NDB's near the aircraft.

use a low frequency NDB, operate at dusk and dawn, use a high
powered NDB and utilise NDB's afar off from the aircraft.

11 62.1.2.0.5 errors and accuracy Typ: MC 178 AviaExam564 6/28/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

If a failed RMI rose is stuck on 090° and the ADF pointer indicates 225°, the
relative bearing to the station will be:

135°.

Impossible to read, due to the RMI failure.

315°.

225°.

12 62.1.2.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1067 83 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is on Heading 225° (M) ADF RMI reading 315° (M) variation 15° (W),
Quadrantal error will be:

Zero.

Maximum.

proportional to sine heading times the signal strength.

proportional to the tangent of the RMI reading.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 5

13 62.1.2.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1068 84 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is maintaining a track outbound from an NDB with a constant


relative bearing of 187° and a heading of 060° M. .To return to the NDB, the
relative bearing to maintain is;

067°

353°

007°

247°

14 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 179 AviaExam1058 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is following the 45°N parallel of latitude.


The track followed is a:

rhumb line

constant-heading track

great circle

constant-drift track

15 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 180 AviaExam1059 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
value for the flattening of the Earth is 1/298.
Earth's semi-major axis, as measured at the equator, equals 6378.4 km.
What is the semi-minor axis (km) of the earth at the axis of the poles?

6 356.9

6 378.4

6 367.0

6 399.9
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 6

16 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1069 85 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft on heading 040° M has an ADF reading of 060° Relative. The


alteration of heading to intercept the 120° Track inbound to the NDB at 50° in
zero wind conditions is;

30° Right.

20° Right.

40° Right.

50° Right.

17 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 181 AviaExam1060 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Position A is located on the equator at longitude 130°00E.


Position B is located 100 NM from A on a bearing of 225°(T).
The coordinates of position B are:

01°11'S 128°49'E

01°11'N 131°11'E

01°11'S 131°11'E

01°11'N 128°49'E

18 62.1.2.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1070 86 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The ICAO NDB frequency band is;

200 khz to 500 khz.

200 khz to 800 khz.

200 khz to 1750 khz.

200 khz to 112 Mhz.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 7

19 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 182 AviaExam1061 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to fly from position A (10°00'N, 030°00'W) to position B (30°00'N,


050°00'W), maintaining a constant true course, it is necessary to fly:

a rhumb line track

the constant average drift route

the great-circle route

a straight line plotted on a Lambert chart

20 62.2.4.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1071 48 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The advantages of Single Side-Band Transmissions as compared with Double


Side- Band Transmissions are:

Long range transmission and narrow band width.

Narrow band width in the frequency band.

Transmitter power is concentrated on three frequencies.

Power is concentrated on frequency.

21 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1072 49 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The purpose of Beat Frequency Oscillator (BFO) in ADF receiver is to;

Improve the strength of the incoming signal .

Remove noise from the incoming signal .

Make the incoming signal audible .

Remove oscillations of the bearing indicator.

22 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 183 AviaExam1062 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The rhumb line track between position A (45°00'N, 010°00'W) and position B
(48°30'N, 015°00'W) is approximately:

315

330

300

345
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 8

23 62.1.5.0.5 errors and accuracy Typ: MC 1073 50 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When there is a significant fault in the transmission of the ILS, the following
will happen;

A flag alarm showing 'off' appears on the appropriate window.

The needle moves to the centre and the flag appears in the appropriate
window .

The alarm flag showing 'ON' appears in the appropriate window.

No indication.

24 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 184 AviaExam1063 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The diameter of the Earth is approximately:

12 700 km

6 350 km

18 500 km

40 000 km

25 62.1.5.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1074 51 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The Glipe Path angle of an ILS is 3°. What is the elevation coverage?

0.45° below GP to 1.75° above GP.

1.35° from the horizontal to 5.25° from the horizontal.

0.45° below the GP to 1.75 above the ILS reference point.

8° either side of the ILS reference point.

26 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 185 AviaExam1066 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The maximum difference between geocentric and geodetic latitude occurs at


about:

45° North and South

60° North and South

90° North and South

0° North and South (equator)


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 9

27 62.1.3.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1075 52 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00


With reference to VOR the cone of confusion is;

an area around a VOR station where the signals radiate in a confused


pattern.

an area overhead a VOR station in form of a cone with a vertical angle of


about 80° where the VOR indications are undetermined.

an area overhead a VOR station in the form of an inverted cone which


has 10 degrees either side of the vertical where the VOR indications are
undetermined.

an area around a VOR station where the reading is zero.

28 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 186 AviaExam1074 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The nominal scale of a Lambert conformal conic chart is the:

scale at the standard parallels

mean scale between pole and equator

mean scale between the parallels of the secant cone

scale at the equator

29 62.1.4.0.5 errors and accuracy Typ: MC 1076 53 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

DME signals are affected by:

static and night effect.

thunderstorm and propagation errors.

night effect and propagation errors.

none of the responses

30 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 187 AviaExam1075 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The chart that is generally used for navigation in polar areas is based on a:

Stereographical projection

Direct Mercator projection

Gnomonic projection

Lambert conformal projection


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 10

31 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 188 AviaExam1077 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A Mercator chart has a scale at the equator = 1: 3 704 000.


What is the scale at latitude 60° S?

1: 1 852 000

1: 7 408 000

1: 3 208 000

1: 185 200

32 62.7.1 Ground Proximity Warning System Typ: MC 1077 54 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What circumstances would cause a warning shortly after take-off when using
Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS)?

Height loss between 100 ft - 700 ft.

Height loss between 100 ft - 500 ft.

Height loss between 50 ft - 700 ft.

Height loss between 200 ft - 700 ft.

33 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 189 AviaExam1079 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The distance measured between two points on a navigation map is 42 mm


(millimetres). The scale of the chart is 1:1 600 000.
The actual distance between these two point is approximately:

36.30 NM

370.00 NM

67.20 NM

3.69 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 11

34 62.6.1.0.1 principles of operation (airborne system) Typ: MC 1078 55 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In a Doppler display in an aircraft the distance to go on the stage is usually


more accurate than the distance left/right of the desired track because:

The land/sea switch enhances sensitivity and therefore ground speed


input for the calculation of distance to G is very accurate.

The Doppler computer is much more accurate when computing distance


to go.

The heading input is the main source of error and it affects the across
track accuracy.

none of the above.

35 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 190 AviaExam1081 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The standard parallels of a Lambert's conical orthomorphic projection are


07°40'N and 38°20' N.
The constant of the cone for this chart is:-

0.39

0.60

0.92

0.42

36 62.2.2.0.4 range Typ: MC 1079 56 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The maximum range of a Radar is governed by;

Pulse repetition frequency.

Pulse interval.

Pulse repetition frequency and pulse interval.

Pulse width.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 12

37 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 191 AviaExam1090 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert conformal conic chart the convergence of the meridians:

is the same as earth convergency at the parallel of origin

is zero throughout the chart

varies as the secant of the latitude

equals earth convergency at the standard parallels

38 62.2.4.0.4 modes and codes incl. S Typ: MC 1080 57 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

With respect to Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR), Mode C provides;

Normal Identification of Aircraft.

Radio failure when coupled with code A 7600.

Automatic Pressure Attitude Information.

The range of the Aircraft.

39 62.2.3.0.7 application of navigation Typ: MC 1081 58 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

State three uses of weather radar in addition to the cloud detection;

safe terrain clearance, determination of approximate cloud heights,


ground mapping.

ground mapping, detection of Clear Air Turbulence (CAT) determination


of approximate cloud heights.

safe Terrain Clearance, ground Mapping, Air Traffic Control Separation


Purposes.

indicate height, distance and amount of cloud.

40 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 192 AviaExam1091 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A straight line drawn on a chart measures 4.63 cm and represents 150 NM.
The chart scale is:

1: 6 000 000

1: 3 000 000

1: 5 000 000

1: 1 000 000
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 13

41 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 193 AviaExam1093 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Polar Stereographic chart, the initial great circle course from A 70°N
060°W to B 70°N 060°E is approximately:

030° (T)

330° (T)

150° (T)

210° (T)

42 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 194 AviaExam1095 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Direct Mercator chart, a rhumb line appears as a:

straight line

small circle concave to the nearer pole

spiral curve

curve convex to the nearer pole

43 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 195 AviaExam1096 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A VOR is sited at position A (45°00'N, 010°00'E). An aircraft is located at


position B (44°00'N, 010°00'E). Assuming that the magnetic variation at A is
10°W and at B is 15°W, the aircraft is on VOR radial:

190°

195°

185°

180°

44 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1084 61 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the Barometer reads 1010 hpa at ground level and 1008 hpa at height on top
of a building, what is the height of the building?

30 ft.

60 ft.

90 ft.

120 ft.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 14

45 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1085 62 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What happens to the capsule in an altimeter as the aircraft gains height?

The value of static pressure decreases and the capsule expands under
the tension of the spring.

The value of the static pressure increases and the capsule contracts
under the tension of atmospheric pressure.

The value of the static and atmospheric pressure equalise within and
around the capsule.

The value of the static pressure increases and the capsule contracts
under the tension of the spring.

46 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 196 AviaExam1101 7/24/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The great circle distance between position A (59°34.1'N 008°08.4'E) and B


(30°25.9'N 171°51.6'W) is:

5 400 NM

10 800 km

2 700 NM

10 800 NM

47 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1086 63 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Under what conditions are altimeters, calibrated?

MSL pressure 1013.0 hpa, MSL Temp O°C lapse rate 1.98° per 1000 ft
from MSL to 10,000 ft. etc.

MSL pressure 1020 hpa, MSL Temp + 15°C Lapse rate 2° per 1 000 ft
from MSL to 20,000 ft etc.

MSL pressure 10 1 3.2 hpa MSL Temp + 15°C Lapse rate 1.98° per I 000 ft
from MSL to 36,000 etc.

MSL pressure 1020 hpa, MSL temp O°C Lapse rate 2° per 1000 ft from
MSL to 55000 ft etc.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 15

48 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 197 AviaExam1104 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert Conformal Conic chart great circles that are not meridians are:

curves concave to the parallel of origin

straight lines regardless of distance

curves concave to the pole of projection

straight lines within the standard parallels

49 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1087 64 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the cause of pressure error in an altimeter?

Position of the altimeter.

Position of the Aircraft in flight.

Position of the pitot tube.

Position of the static vent.

50 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 198 AviaExam1105 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a direct Mercator projection, at latitude 45° North, a certain length


represents 70 NM.
At latitude 30° North, the same length represents approximately:

86 NM

57 NM

70 NM

81 NM

51 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1088 65 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When flying from an area of high pressure to an area of low pressure, what
indication does the altimeter give in relation to the height AGL?

Zero.

Under-reads.

Over-reads

Height change not indicated.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 16

52 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 199 AviaExam1106 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Position A 45°N, ?°E
Position B 45°N, 45°15'E
Distance A-B = 280 NM
B is to the East of A
Required: longitude of position A?

38°39'E

49°57'E

51°51'E

40°33'E

53 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 200 AviaExam1110 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a polar stereographic projection chart showing the South Pole, a straight


line joins position A (70°S 065°E) to position B (70°S 025°W).
The true course on departure from position A is approximately:

225°

250°

135°

315°

54 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 201 AviaExam1113 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a direct Mercator projection, the distance measured between two


meridians spaced 5° apart at latitude 60°N is 8 cm.
The scale of this chart at latitude 60°N is approximately:

1: 3 500 000

1: 4 750 000

1: 7 000 000

1: 6 000 000
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 17

55 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1091 78 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Mercator chart, a great circle is represented as a:

Straight line.

Curve concave to the Equator.

Curve concave to the nearer pole.

Curve concave to the meridians.

56 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 202 AviaExam1115 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Two positions plotted on a polar stereographic chart, A (80°N 000°) and B


(70°N 102°W) are joined by a straight line whose highest latitude is reached at
035°W.
At point B, the true course is:

203°

023°

247°

305°

57 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1092 1 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the meaning of the word "wave length" in relation to radio signals?

The maximum displacement or value a radio signal attains from its mean
position during a cycle.

The number of cycles occurring in one second expressed in Hertz.

The physical distance traveled by the radio wave during one complete
cycle of transmission.

One complete series of values or one complete process.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 18

58 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 203 AviaExam1118 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

How does the scale vary in a Direct Mercator chart?

The scale increases with increasing distance from the Equator.

The scale decreases with increasing distance from the Equator.

The scale is constant.

The scale increases south of the Equator and decreases north of the
Equator.

59 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1093 1 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency of a radio wave is :

the distance travelled during the transmission of one cycle

the rate of chnage of a wave

one complete change of direction of current

the number of cycles in one second

60 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 204 AviaExam1121 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Magnetic heading 311°
Drift angle 10° left
Relative bearing of NDB 270°
What is the magnetic bearing of the NDB measured from the aircraft?

221°

208°

211°

180°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 19

61 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1094 1 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

With reference to basic radio theory, the amplitude of a radio wave is:

one complete change of direction:

the peak value of the current in either direction

the number of cycles in one second

the longitudial dispalcement of a sine wave

62 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 205 AviaExam1123 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A DME station is located 1000 feet above MSL.


An aircraft flying at FL 370 in ISA conditions which is 15 NM away from the
DME station, will have a DME reading of:

16 NM

14 NM

15 NM

17 NM

63 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1095 8 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency which corresponds to a wavelength of 12 cm is ;

2 500 kHz

250 GHz

2 500 MHz

2 500 Hz
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 20

64 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 206 AviaExam1124 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given the following:


True track: 192°
Magnetic variation: 7°E
Drift angle: 5° left
What is the magnetic heading required to maintain the given track?

190°

194°

204°

180°

65 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1096 9 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency which corresponds to a wavelength of 1500 metres is

400 Hz

200 KHz

400 MHz

2 000 GHz

66 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 207 AviaExam1125 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given the following:


Magnetic heading: 060°
Magnetic variation: 8°W
Drift angle: 4° right
What is the true track?

056°

064°

048°

072°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 21

67 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1097 10 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the transmission frequency is 75 MHz, the wavelength is

8 cm

4 metres

800 m

4 km

68 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 208 AviaExam1128 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is following a true track of 048° at a constant TAS of 210 kt.


The wind velocity is 350° / 30 kt.
The GS and drift angle are:

192 kt, 7° right

200 kt, 3.5° right

192 kt, 7° left

225 kt, 7° left

69 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1098 12 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the frequency of a raio aid is 1 439 kHz, the wavelength is

208.47 metres

208.47 cm

2.0847 cm

0.20847 metres
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 22

70 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 209 AviaExam1131 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
FL 350,
Mach 0.80,
OAT -55°C.
Calculate the values for TAS and local speed of sound (LSS)?

461 kt , LSS 576 kt

237 kt, LSS 296 kt

490 kt, LSS 461 kt

461 kt , LSS 296 kt

71 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 210 AviaExam1137 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Magnetic heading = 255°
VAR = 40°W
GS = 375 kt
W/V = 235°(T) / 120 kt
Calculate the drift angle?

6° left

6° right

9° left

3° left

72 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1100 2 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The wavelength of a radio wave transmission is:

the number of cycles in one second

the distance travelled during the transmission of one cycle

one complete change of direction of current

the lateral dispalcement of a wave


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 23

73 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 211 AviaExam1140 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True Heading = 180°
TAS = 500 kt
W/V 225° / 100 kt
Calculate the GS?

435 kt

600 kt

535 kt

450 kt

74 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 212 AviaExam1141 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True heading = 310°
TAS = 200 kt
GS = 176 kt
Drift angle 7° right.
Calculate the W/V?

270° / 33 kt

360° / 33 kt

090° / 33 kt

180° / 33 kt

75 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 213 AviaExam1143 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following will give the most accurate calculation of aircraft
ground speed?

A DME station sited on the flight route

An ADF sited on the flight route

A VOR station sited on the flight route

A DME station sited across the flight route


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 24

76 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1102 3 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Polarisation is the term used to describe the plane of oscillation of the;

electrical field of an electromagnetic wave

the magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave

the electrical and magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave

none of the above

77 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 214 AviaExam1144 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

If an aeroplane was to circle around the Earth following parallel 60°N at a


ground speed of 480 kt. In order to circle around the Earth along the equator
in the same amount of time, it should fly at a ground speed of:

960 kt

240 kt

550 kt

480 kt

78 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1104 3 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Polarisation is the term used to describe the plane of oscillation of the;

electrical field of an electromagnetic wave

the magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave

the electrical and magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave

none of the above


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 25

79 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 215 AviaExam1146 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True Heading = 090°
TAS = 180 kt
GS = 180 kt
Drift 5° right
Calculate the W/V?

005° / 15 kt

190° / 15 kt

355° / 15 kt

185° / 15 kt

80 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 216 AviaExam1147 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True Heading = 090°
TAS = 200 kt
W/V = 220° / 30 kt.
Calculate the GS?

220 kt

230 kt

180 kt

200 kt

81 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1105 4 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Radio waves travel at the speed of light which is taken to be constant at

3 x 105 cm/sec

3 x 108 m/sec

3 x 1010 km/sec

3 x 120nm/s
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 26

82 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1106 4 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Radio waves travel at the speed of light which is taken to be constant at

3 x 105 cm/sec

3 x 108 m/sec

3 x 1010 km/sec

3 x 120nm/s

83 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 217 AviaExam1150 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aeroplane is flying at TAS 180 kt on a track of 090°.


The W/V is 045° / 50kt.
How far can the aeroplane fly out from its base and return in one hour?

85 NM

88 NM

56 NM

176 NM

84 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 218 AviaExam1151 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The following information is displayed on an Inertial Navigation System:


GS 520 kt,
True HDG 090°,
Drift angle 5° right,
TAS 480 kt.
SAT (static air temperature) -51°C.
The W/V being experienced is:

320° / 60 kt

225° / 60 kt

220° / 60 kt

325° / 60 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 27

85 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1108 6 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency corresponding to a wavelength of 750 metres is

400 Hz

400 MHz

400 KHz

400 GHz

86 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 219 AviaExam1156 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The reported surface wind from the Control Tower is 240°/35 kt. Runway 30
(300°).
What is the cross-wind component?

30 kt

24 kt

27 kt

21 kt

87 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 220 AviaExam1158 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft passes position A (60°00'N 120°00'W) on route to position B


(60°00'N 140°30'W).
What is the great circle track on departure from A?

279°

288°

261°

270°

88 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1110 6 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency corresponding to a wavelength of 750 metres is

400 Hz

400 MHz

400 KHz

400 GHz
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 28

89 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 221 AviaExam1159 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A great circle track joins position A (59°S 141°W) and B (61°S 148°W).
What is the difference between the great circle track at A and B?

It increases by 6°

It decreases by 6°

It increases by 3°

It decreases by 3°

90 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 222 AviaExam1161 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the longitude of a position 6 NM to the east of 58°42'N 094°00'W?

093°48.5'W

093°54.0'W

093°53.1'W

094°12.0'W

91 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1111 7 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the frequency of a radar set is 13 500 MHz, the wavelength is

2.22 metres

0.22 metres

0.22 cm

2.22 cm

92 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 223 AviaExam1167 7/25/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is maintaining a 5.2% gradient is at 7 NM from the runway, on a flat


terrain; its height is approximately:

2210 FT

680 FT

1890 FT

3640 FT
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 29

93 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 224 AviaExam1586 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The amplitude modulation and the colour of an outer marker (OM) is:

400 Hz, blue

3000 Hz, blue

1300 Hz, blue

400 Hz, amber

94 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 225 AviaExam1591 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An RMI indicates aircraft heading and bearing. To convert the RMI bearings of
NDBs and VORs to true bearings the correct combination for the application
of magnetic variation is:

NDB: aircraft position


VOR: beacon position

NDB: beacon position


VOR: beacon position

NDB: beacon position


VOR: aircraft position

NDB: aircraft position


VOR: aircraft position

95 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1114 8 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Radio intelligence and information are relayed from a transmitter to a receiver


by;

polarisation

modulation

phase difference

line-of-sight
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 30

96 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 226 AviaExam1608 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying on the true track 090° towards a VOR station located near
the equator where the magnetic variation is 15°E. The variation at the aircraft
position is 8°E.
The aircraft is on VOR radial:

255°

278°

262°

285°

97 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 227 AviaExam1610 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Magnetic heading 280°
VOR radial 090°
What bearing should be selected on the omni-bearing selector in order to
centralise the VOR deviation needle with a "TO" indication?

270°

280°

100°

090°

98 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1117 9 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Amplitude modulation is;

varying the frequency of the carrier in accordance with the change in the
amplitude of the audio, keeping the amplitude of the carrier constant

varying the amplitude of the audio frequency in accordance with the


change in amplitude of the carrier, keeping the frequency of the carrire
constant

varying the amplitude of the carrier wave in accordance with the change
in amplitude of the audio modulating signal keeping the carrier
frequency constant

All of the options


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 31

99 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 228 AviaExam1614 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A VOR is sited at position 58°00'N 073°00'W where the magnetic variation


equals 32°W.
An aircraft is located at position 56°00'N 073°00'W where the magnetic
variation equals 28°W.
The aircraft is on VOR radial:

212

208

360

180

100 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 229 AviaExam1615 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to plot a bearing from a VOR station, a pilot needs to know the
magnetic variation:

at the VOR

at the aircraft location

at the half-way point between the aircraft and the station

at both the VOR and aircraft

101 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1119 9 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Amplitude modulation is;

varying the frequency of the carrier in accordance with the change in the
amplitude of the audio, keeping the amplitude of the carrier constant

varying the amplitude of the audio frequency in accordance with the


change in amplitude of the carrier, keeping the frequency of the carrire
constant

varying the amplitude of the carrier wave in accordance with the change
in amplitude of the audio modulating signal keeping the carrier
frequency constant

All of the options


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 32

102 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 230 AviaExam1616 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aeroplane flies over position A which is due North of a VOR station sited at
position B.
The magnetic variation at A is 18°W, and at B is 10°W.
What radial from B is the aircraft on?

010°

018°

350°

342°

103 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1120 10 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Two advantages of single side band transmissions are;

broader bandwidth and transmitting power concentrated in two


frequencies instead of three

narrower bandwidth and transmitting power concentrated in two


frequencies instead of three

narrower bandwidth and transmitting power concentrated in three


frequencies instead of two

none of the above

104 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 231 AviaExam1618 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft DME receiver does not lock on to its own transmissions reflected
from the ground because:

they are not on the receiver frequency

DME transmits twin pulses

the pulse recurrence rates are varied

DME uses the UHF band


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 33

105 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 232 AviaExam1620 8/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The DME (Distance Measuring Equipment) operates within the following


frequencies:

962 to 1213 MHz

108 to 118 MHz

329 to 335 MHz

962 to 1213 kHz.

106 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 233 AviaExam1623 8/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A DME is located at MSL.


An aircraft passing vertically above the station at flight level FL 360 will obtain
a DME range of approximately:

6 NM

7 NM

11 NM

8 NM

107 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 234 AviaExam1626 8/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

During a flight at FL 210, a pilot does not receive any DME distance indication
from a DME station located approximately 220 NM away.
The reason for this is that the:

aeroplane is below the 'line of sight' altitude

aeroplane is circling around the station

altitude is too high

range of a DME system is always less than 200 NM


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 34

108 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1123 11 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When considering factors affecting radio wave propagation it can be said


that;

as frequency is increased surface attenuation decreases

as frequency is increased ionospheric attenuation increases

as frequency is increased ionospheric attenuation decreases

as frequency is increased surface attenuation increases

109 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 235 AviaExam1628 8/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the approximate angular coverage of reliable navigation information


for a 3° ILS glide path out to a minimum distance of 10 NM?

1.35° above the horizontal to 5.25° above the horizontal and 8° each side
of the localiser centreline

0.45° above the horizontal to 1.75° above the glide path and 8° each side
of the localiser centreline

0.7° above and below the glide path and 2.5° each side of the localiser
centreline

3° above and below the glide path and 10° each side of the localiser
centreline

110 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 236 AviaExam1632 8/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is descending down a 6% slope whilst maintaining a G/S of 300 kt.


The rate of descent of the aircraft is approximately:

1800 FT/MIN

10800 FT/MIN

3600 FT/MIN

900 FT/MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 35

111 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1126 12 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Skip distance is the distance between;

the transmitter and the first point of sky wave touchdown

successive sky wave touchdown points

the end of the ground wave and the first point of touchdown

the distance of a wave from the surface to the ozonosphere

112 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 237 AviaExam1636 8/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

When Mode C is selected on the aircraft SSR transponder the additional


information transmitted is:

flight level based on 1013.25 hPa

altitude based on regional QNH

aircraft height based on sub-scale setting

height based on QFE

113 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 238 AviaExam1637 8/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The ground Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR) equipment incorporates a


transmitter and receiver respectively operating in the following frequencies:

Transmitter Receiver

1030 MHz 1090 MHz

1090 MHz 1030 MHz

1090 MHz 1090 MHz

1030 MHz 1030 MHz


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 36

114 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 239 AviaExam1647 8/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Assuming sufficient transmission power, the maximum range of a ground


radar with a pulse repetition frequency of 450 pulses per second is: (Given:
velocity of light is 300 000 km/second)

333 km

666 km

1333 km

150 km

115 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1128 12 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Skip distance is the distance between;

the transmitter and the first point of sky wave touchdown

successive sky wave touchdown points

the end of the ground wave and the first point of touchdown

the distance of a wave from the surface to the ozonosphere

116 61.1.1 The solar system Typ: MC 240 AviaExam1779 8/19/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The angle between the plane of the ecliptic and the plane of equator is
approximately:

23.5°

25.3°

27.5°

66.5°

117 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 241 AviaExam1787 8/19/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The duration of civil twilight is the time:

between sunset and when the centre of the sun is 6° below the true
horizon

agreed by the international aeronautical authorities which is 12 minutes

needed by the sun to move from the apparent height of 0° to the


apparent height of 6°

between sunset and when the centre of the sun is 12° below the true
horizon
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 37

118 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 242 AviaExam1790 8/19/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On the 27th of February, at 52°S and 040°E, the sunrise is at 0243 UTC.
On the same day, at 52°S and 035°W, the sunrise is at:

0743 UTC

0243 UTC

2143 UTC

0523 UTC

119 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 243 AviaExam1795 8/19/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aeroplane flies from A (59°S 142°W) to B (61°S 148°W) with a TAS of 480 kt.

The autopilot is engaged and coupled with an Inertial Navigation System in


which AB track is active.
On route AB, the true track:

increases by 5°

varies by 10°

decreases by 6°

varies by 4°

120 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1132 14 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When using HF communications at night the best frequency is one which is;

half the day frequency

twice the day frequency

thrice the day frequency

the same as the frequency for day operation


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 38

121 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 244 AviaExam1797 8/19/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The rhumb-line distance between points A (60°00'N 002°30'E) and B (60°00'N


007°30'W) is:

300 NM

450 NM

600 NM

150 NM

122 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 245 AviaExam1807 8/20/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is over position HO (55°30'N 060°15'W), where YYR VOR (53°30'N


060°15'W) can be received. The magnetic variation is 31°W at HO and 28°W at
YYR.
What is the radial from YYR?

028°

208°

031°

332°

123 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1134 14 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When using HF communications at night the best frequency is one which is;

half the day frequency

twice the day frequency

thrice the day frequency

the same as the frequency for day operation


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 39

124 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 246 AviaExam1808 8/20/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 485 kt,
OAT = ISA +10°C,
FL 410.
Calculate the Mach Number?

0.825

0.90

0.85

0.87

125 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1135 15 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL100 should be able to communicate with a VHF ground station


at 100 ft amsl at an approximate maximum range of

25 nm

112.5 nm

123.2 nm

137.5 nm

126 61.4.6 Resolution of current DR problems by means of: Typ: MC 247 AviaExam1818 8/20/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

060-001.jpg
Assume a North polar stereographic chart whose grid is
aligned with the Greenwich meridian.
An aircraft flies from the geographic North pole for a distance
of 480 NM along the 110°E meridian, then follows a grid track
of 154° for a distance of 300 NM.
Its position is now approximately:

80°00'N 080°E

78°45'N 087°E

79°15'N 074°E

70°15'N 080°E
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 40

127 61.4.6 Resolution of current DR problems by means of: Typ: MC 248 AviaExam1822 8/21/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
A polar stereographic chart whose grid is aligned with the zero meridian.
Grid track 344°,
Longitude 115°00'W,
Calculate the true course?

229°

099°

279°

049°

128 61.4.6 Resolution of current DR problems by means of: Typ: MC 249 AviaExam1828 8/21/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

060-002.jpg
1215 UTC LAJES VORTAC (38°46'N 027°05'W) RMI reads 178°,
range 135 NM.
Calculate the aircraft position at 1215 UTC?

40°55'N 027°55'W

40°50'N 027°40'W

41°00'N 028°10'W

41°05'N 027°50'W

129 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1139 16 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The ionosphere is split into three distinct layers during day time which are;

D layer, Appleton layer, F layer

D layer, Kennelley Heaviside layer , Appleton layer

E layer, Kennelley Heaviside layer, D layer

E layer, Appleton layer, F layer


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 41

130 61.4.6 Resolution of current DR problems by means of: Typ: MC 250 AviaExam1829 8/21/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

060-002.jpg
1300 UTC DR position 37°30'N 021°30'W alter heading
PORT SANTO NDB (33°03'N 016°23'W)
TAS 450 kt,
Forecast W/V 360°/30kt.
Calculate the ETA at PORT SANTO NDB?

1348

1344

1341

1354

131 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 251 AviaExam1836 8/21/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

For a distance of 1860 NM between Q and R, a ground speed "out" of 385 kt, a
ground speed "back" of 465 kt and an endurance of 8 HR (excluding reserves)
the distance from Q to the point of safe return (PSR) is:

1685 NM

1532 NM

930 NM

1865 NM

132 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1141 17 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The aircraft aerial(s) used to determine the direction of an NDB beacon is/are

loop and sense aerials

sense aerial

loop aerial

omni-directional aerials
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 42

133 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 252 AviaExam1837 8/21/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Two points A and B are 1000 NM apart. TAS = 490 kt.


On the flight between A and B the equivalent headwind is -20 kt.
On the return leg between B and A, the equivalent headwind is +40 kt.
What distance from A, along the route A to B, is the Point of Equal Time
(PET)?

530 NM

470 NM

455 NM

500 NM

134 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 253 AviaExam1839 8/21/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
AD = Air distance
GD = Ground distance
TAS = True Airspeed
GS = Groundspeed
Which of the following is the correct formula to calculate ground distance
(GD) gone?

GD = (AD X GS)/TAS

GD = (AD - TAS)/TAS

GD = AD X (GS -TAS)/GS

GD = TAS/(GS X AD)

135 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 254 AviaExam1850 8/22/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying with the aid of an inertial navigation system (INS)


connected to the autopilot. The following two points have been entered in the
INS computer:
WPT 1: 60°N 030°W
WPT 2: 60°N 020°W
When 025°W is passed the latitude shown on the display unit of the inertial
navigation system will be:

60°05.7'N

60°00.0'N

59°49.0'N

60°11.0'N
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 43

136 61.6.3 Accuracy, reliability, errors and coverage Typ: MC 255 AviaExam1862 8/29/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The drift of the azimuth gyro on an inertial unit induces an error in the
position given by this unit. "t" being the elapsed time.
The total error is:

proportional to t

proportional to the square of time, t²

proportional to t/2

sinusoîdal

137 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1144 18 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When determining the direction of an NDB station, the 180? ambiguity is


resolved by using a;

loop aerial

guyed aerial

sense aerial

sense aerial and then a loop aerial

138 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 256 AviaExam1866 8/29/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

With reference to inertial navigation systems, a TAS input is:

required to provide a W/V read out

not required

required for Polar navigation

required for rhumb line navigation

139 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 257 AviaExam1867 8/29/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The platform of an inertial navigation system (INS) is maintained at right


angles to the local vertical by applying corrections for the effects of:

aircraft manoeuvres, earth rotation, transport wander and coriolis

gyroscopic inertia, earth rotation and real drift

vertical velocities, earth precession, centrifugal forces and transport


drift

movement in the yawing plane, secondary precession and pendulous


oscillation
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 44

140 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 258 AviaExam1869 8/29/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft travels from point A to point B, using the autopilot connected to


the aircraft's inertial system. The coordinates of A (45°S 010°W) and B (45°S
030°W) have been entered.
The true course of the aircraft on its arrival at B, to the nearest degree, is:

277°

284°

263°

270°

141 62.1.2.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1147 19 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

NDB bearings displayed on an ADF are relative bearings with reference to;

magnetic North

true North

aircraft track

aircraft heading

142 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 259 AviaExam1870 8/29/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Some inertial reference and navigation systems are known as "strapdown".


This means that:

the gyroscopes and accelerometers become part of the unit's fixture to


the aircraft structure

only the gyros, and not the accelerometers, become part of the unit's
fixture to the aircraft structure

gyros and accelerometers are mounted on a stabilised platform in the


aircraft

gyros and accelerometers need satellite information input to obtain a


vertical reference
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 45

143 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 260 AviaExam1872 8/29/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

As the INS position of the departure aerodrome, coordinates 35°32.7'N


139°46.3'W are input instead of 35°32.7'N 139°46.3'E. When the aircraft
subsequently passes point 52°N 180°W, the longitude value shown on the INS
will be:

099° 32.6'W

099° 32.6'E

080° 27.4'E

080° 27.4'W

144 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 261 AviaExam1873 8/29/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to maintain an accurate vertical using a pendulous system, an aircraft


inertial platform incorporates a device:

with damping and a period of 84.4 MIN

without damping and a period of 84.4 MIN

without damping and a period of 84.4 SEC

with damping and a period of 84.4 SEC

145 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1150 20 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The cardoid polar diagram resulting from the resolution of the 180? ambiguity
has;

two maxima and non nulls

two nulls and one maximum, giving the direction of the station

four nulls

one null giving the direction of the station


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 46

146 62.1.1 Ground D/F Typ: MC 262 AviaExam2249 11/3/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the approximate maximum theoretical range at which an aircraft at


FL130 could receive information from a VDF facility which is sited 1024 FT
above MSL?

180 NM

220 NM

120 NM

150 NM

147 62.1.1 Ground D/F Typ: MC 263 AviaExam2250 11/3/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In ISA conditions, what is the maximum theoretical range at which an aircraft


at FL80 can expect to obtain bearings from a ground VDF facility sited 325 ft
above MSL ?

134 NM

158 NM

107 NM

114 NM

148 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1153 21 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The aerials used when an ADF operates on "Automatic Direction Finding" are;

loop aerial only

sense aerial only

omni-directional aerials

loop and sense aerials together


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 47

149 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 264 AviaExam2253 11/4/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A radio beacon has an operational range of 10 NM. By what factor should the
transmitter power be increased in order to achieve an operational range of 20
NM?

Four

Six

Eight

Two

150 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 265 AviaExam2255 11/4/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

'Night Effect' which causes loss of signal and fading, resulting in bearing
errors from NDB transmissions, is due to:

skywave distortion of the null position and is maximum at dawn and


dusk

interference from other transmissions and is maximum at dusk when


east of the NDB

static activity increasing at night particularly in the lower frequency


band

the effect of the Aurora Borealis

151 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 266 AviaExam2256 11/4/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Quadrantal errors associated with aircraft Automatic Direction Finding (ADF)


equipment are caused by:

signal bending by the aircraft metallic surfaces

signal bending caused by electrical interference from aircraft wiring

misalignment of the loop aerial

skywave/groundwave contamination
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 48

152 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 267 AviaExam2257 11/4/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Errors caused by the effect of coastal refraction on bearings at lower altitudes


are maximum when the NDB is:

inland and the bearing crosses the coast at an acute angle

near the coast and the bearing crosses the coast at right angles

inland and the bearing crosses the coast at right angles

near the coast and the bearing crosses the coast at an acute angle

153 62.1.2.0.6 factors affecting range Typ: MC 1156 22 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The four factors affecting the accuracy of NDB's are;

quadrantal error, mountain effect, night effect and static interference

thunderstorm effect, night effect, slant range error,and station


interference

quandrantal error,night effect, pilotage error and aggregate error

all of the options.

154 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 268 AviaExam2259 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The principle used in VOR bearing measurement is:

phase comparison

envelope matching

beat frequency discrimination

difference in depth of modulation

155 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 269 AviaExam2260 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Which frequency band is used by VOR transmissions?

VHF

UHF

SHF

HF
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 49

156 62.1.3.0.5 errors and accuracy Typ: MC 1159 23 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Precautions to reduce the effect of night effect on ADF bearings are to;

avoid use the ADF within one hour of sunrise and sunset and use a
weaker beacon to eliminate skywaves

use a more powerfull beacon and bearings taken well within the surface
wave range

choose the nearest station and only use the ADF within one hour of
sunrise and sunset

use the transmitter/receiver intermittently by switching "on" and "off"

157 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 270 AviaExam2261 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Transmissions from VOR facilities may be adversely affected by:

uneven propagation over irregular ground surfaces

static interference

night effect

quadrantal error

158 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 271 AviaExam2262 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

If VOR bearing information is used beyond the published protection range,


errors could be caused by:

interference from other transmitters

noise from precipitation static exceeding the signal strength of the


transmitter

sky wave interference from the same transmitter

sky wave interference from distant transmitters on the same frequency


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 50

159 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 272 AviaExam2263 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is 100 NM from a VOR facility. Assuming no error when using a


deviation indicator where 1 dot = 2° deviation, how many dots deviation from
the centre line of the instrument will represent the limits of the airway
boundary? (Assume that the airway is 10 NM wide)

1.5

3.0

4.5

6.0

160 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 273 AviaExam2264 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An airway 10 NM wide is to be defined by two VORs each having a resultant


bearing accuracy of plus or minus 5.5°.
In order to ensure accurate track guidance within the airway limits the
maximum distance apart for the transmitter is approximately:

105 NM

50 NM

165 NM

210 NM

161 62.1.2.0.4 range Typ: MC 1162 24 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The time between two relative bearings of 075 and 090 is 7 minutes 45
seconds and groundspeed is 130 kts. The time and distance to the beacon is;

31 minutes - 67.2 nm

67.2 minutes - 31 nm

116.1 minutes - 251.6 nm

150.7 minutes - 50.5 nm


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 51

162 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 274 AviaExam2265 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is required to approach a VOR via the 104° radial. Which of the
following settings should be made on the VOR/ILS deviation indicator?

284° with the TO flag showing

284° with the FROM flag showing

104° with the TO flag showing

104° with the FROM flag showing

163 61.1.3.0.4 standard times Typ: MC 1163 24 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The time between two relative bearings of 075 and 090 is 7 minutes 45
seconds and groundspeed is 130 kts. The time and distance to the beacon is;

31 minutes - 67.2 nm

67.2 minutes - 31 nm

116.1 minutes - 251.6 nm

150.7 minutes - 50.5 nm

164 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 275 AviaExam2266 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft, on a heading of 180°M is on a bearing of 270°M from a VOR.


The bearing you should select on the OMNI bearing selector to centralise the
VOR/ILS left/right deviation needle is:

090°

270°

360°

180°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 52

165 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 276 AviaExam2267 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is required to approach a VOR station via the 244° radial. In order
to obtain correct sense indications the deviation indicator should be set to:

064° with the TO flag showing

064° with the FROM flag showing

244° with the FROM flag showing

244° with the TO flag showing

166 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 277 AviaExam2268 11/10/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the maximum theoretical range that an aircraft at FL150 can receive
signals from a VOR situated 609 feet above MSL?

184 NM

220 NM

147 NM

156 NM

167 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1166 25 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft heading 200?M receives a bearing of 190R from an NDB. ATC


instructs the pilot to intercept the 250 QDR outbound from the NDB at 30?.
The intercept heading and the relative bearing at intercept are;

220?M/210

220?M/160

280?M/330

280?M/150

168 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 278 AviaExam2269 11/11/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A typical frequency employed in Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is:

1000 MHz

10 MHz

100 MHz

100 GHz
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 53

169 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 279 AviaExam2270 11/11/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) operates in the:

UHF band and uses two frequencies

VHF band and uses the principle of phase comparison

UHF band and uses one frequency

SHF band and uses frequency modulation techniques

170 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1168 26 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft on a constant heading with 8? right drift is tracking parallel to and


5 nm left of the centre line of an airway. The ADF reading of an NDB on the
centre line 42 nm ahead is;

015?R

359?R

011?R

286?R

171 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 280 AviaExam2271 11/11/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

For a conventional DME facility 'Beacon Saturation' will occur whenever the
number of aircraft interrogations exceeds:

100

200

60

80
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 54

172 62.1.1.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1170 26 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft on a constant heading with 8? right drift is tracking parallel to and


5 nm left of the centre line of an airway. The ADF reading of an NDB on the
centre line 42 nm ahead is;

015?R

359?R

011?R

286?R

173 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 281 AviaExam2273 11/11/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The aircraft DME receiver is able to accept replies to its own transmissions
and reject replies to other aircraft interrogations because:

the time interval between pulse pairs is unique to that particular aircraft

pulse pairs are amplitude modulated with the aircraft registration

aircraft interrogation signals and transponder responses are 63 MHz


removed from each other

transmission frequencies are 63 MHz different for each aircraft

174 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 282 AviaExam2274 11/11/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The aircraft DME receiver cannot lock on to interrogation signals reflected


from the ground because:

aircraft transmitter and DME ground station are transmitting on different


frequencies

reflections are subject to doppler frequency shift

DME transmits twin pulses

DME pulse recurrence rates are varied


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 55

175 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1171 27 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is tracking 065?T, variation 22?W and drift 9? right with an ADF
indication of 237?R. The aircraft heading and indication on an RMI are;

heading 034?M/271?

heading 078?M/315?

heading 088?M/326

heading 096?M/333?

176 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 283 AviaExam2275 11/11/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The design requirements for DME stipulate that, at a range of 100 NM, the
maximum systematic error should not exceed:

+ or - 1.5 NM

+ or - 3 NM

+ or - 0.25 NM

+ or - 1.25 NM

177 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 284 AviaExam2276 11/11/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In which situation will speed indications on an airborne Distance Measuring


Equipment (DME) most closely represent the groundspeed of an aircraft flying
at FL400?

When tracking directly towards the station at a range of 100 NM or more

When passing abeam the station and within 5 NM of it

When overhead the station, with no change of heading at transit

When tracking directly away from the station at a range of 10 NM


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 56

178 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1174 28 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to maintain a track of 165?T away from an NDB (variation 16?W) with
a drift 8? left, the ADF reading required is;

352? relative

259? relative

188? relative

172? relative

179 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 285 AviaExam2277 11/11/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The time taken for the transmission of an interrogation pulse by a Distance


Measuring Equipment (DME) to travel to the ground transponder and return to
the airborne receiver was 2000 micro-second, including time delay. The slant
range from the ground transponder was:

158 NM

186 NM

296 NM

330 NM

180 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 286 AviaExam2279 11/14/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The reason why pre take-off holding areas are sometimes further from the
active runway when ILS Category 2 and 3 landing procedures are in progress
than during good weather operations is:

aircraft manoeuvring near the runway may disturb guidance signals

heavy precipitation may disturb guidance signals

to increase distance from the runway during offset approach operations

to increase aircraft separation in very reduced visibility conditions


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 57

181 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 287 AviaExam2280 11/14/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following correctly describes the Instrument Landing System


(ILS) localiser radiation pattern?

Two overlapping lobes on the same VHF carrier frequency

Two overlapping lobes on the same UHF carrier frequency

A pencil beam comprising a series of smaller beams each carrying a


different modulation

Two overlapping lobes on different radio carrier frequencies but with the
same modulation

182 62.5.5.0.1 principle of operation Typ: MC 1177 29 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The principle of operation of a VOR is bearing measurement by;

polarisation comparison

modulation comparison

de-modulation comparison

phase comparison

183 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 288 AviaExam2281 11/14/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft tracking to intercept the Instrument Landing System (ILS) localiser


inbound on the approach side, outside the published ILS coverage angle:

may receive false course indications

only glide path information is available

will receive signals without identification coding

can expect signals to give correct indications


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 58

184 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 289 AviaExam2282 11/14/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The MIDDLE MARKER of an Instrument Landing System (ILS) facility is


identified audibly and visually by a series of:

alternate dots and dashes and an amber light flashing

two dashes per second and a blue light flashing

dots and a white light flashing

dashes and an amber light flashing

185 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 290 AviaExam2283 11/14/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The OUTER MARKER of an Instrument Landing System (ILS) facility transmits


on a frequency of:

75 MHz and is modulated by morse at two dashes per second

200 MHz and is modulated by alternate dot/dash in morse

75 MHz and is modulated by alternate dot/dash in morse

300 MHz and is modulated by morse at two dashes per second

186 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1180 30 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The two modulations from which bearing information is obtained in a VOR are

both frequency modulated at the transmitter

reference signal frequency modulated and directional signal apparent


amplitude modulated

reference signal apparent amplitude modulated and directional signal


frequency modulated

none of the options are correct


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 59

187 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 291 AviaExam2284 11/14/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

What approximate rate of descent is required in order to maintain a 3° glide


path at a groundspeed of 120 kt?

600 FT/MIN

550 FT/MIN

800 FT/MIN

950 FT/MIN

188 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 292 AviaExam2285 11/14/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The outer marker of an ILS with a 3° glide slope is located 4.6 NM from the
threshold. Assuming a glide slope height of 50 FT above the threshold, the
approximate height of an aircraft passing the outer marker is:

1450 FT

1400 FT

1350 FT

1300 FT

189 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 293 AviaExam2286 11/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Airborne weather radar systems use a wavelength of approximately 3 cm in


order to:

detect the larger water droplets

transmit at a higher pulse repetition frequency for extended range

obtain optimum use of the Cosecant squared beam

detect the smaller cloud formations as well as large

190 62.1.3.0.4 range Typ: MC 1183 31 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The VOR frequency range is;

108 - 112 MHz

108 - 118 MHz

108 - 136 MHz

106 - 136 MHz


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 60

191 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1050 AviaExam2950 5/18/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency which corresponds to a wavelength of 12 cm is:

2500 MHz.

2500 kHz.

360 MHz.

3600 MHz.

192 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1051 AviaExam2950 5/18/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency which corresponds to a wavelength of 12 cm is:

2500 MHz.

2500 kHz.

360 MHz.

3600 MHz.

193 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 294 AviaExam2287 11/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The ISO-ECHO facility of an airborne weather radar is provided in order to:

detect areas of possible severe turbulence in cloud

give an indication of cloud tops

inhibit unwanted ground returns

extend the mapping range

194 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1052 AviaExam2951 5/18/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The wavelength of a radio signal transmitted at the frequency of 75 MHz is:

4 m.

40 m.

7.5 m.

75 m.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 61

195 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 295 AviaExam2288 11/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In the MAPPING MODE the airborne weather radar utilises a:

fan shaped beam effective up to a maximum of 50 NM to 60 NM range

fan shaped beam effective up to a range of 150 NM

pencil beam to a maximum range of 60 NM

pencil beam effective from zero to 150 NM

196 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1053 AviaExam2953 5/18/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The wavelength of a radio signal transmitted at the frequency 118.7 MHz is:

2.53 m.

25.3 m.

2.53 cm.

25.3 cm.

197 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 296 AviaExam2289 11/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following cloud types is most readily detected by airborne


weather radar when using the 'weather beam'?

cumulus

cirrocumulus

stratus

altostratus

198 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 297 AviaExam2290 11/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Why is a secondary radar display screen free of storm clutter?

The principle of 'echo' return is not used in secondary radar

The frequencies employed are too high to give returns from moisture
sources

A moving target indicator facility suppresses the display of static or near


static returns

The frequencies employed are too low to give returns from moisture
sources
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 62

199 62.1.3.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1186 32 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the directional signal leads the reference signal by 30? the magnetic bearing
to the VOR station will be

30?

210?

150?

330?

200 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 298 AviaExam2292 11/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to indicate radio failure the aircraft SSR transponder should be


selected to code:

7600

7700

7000

7500

201 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 299 AviaExam2293 11/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to indicate unlawful interference with the planned operation of the


flight, the aircraft Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR) transponder should be
selected to:

7500

7600

7700

7000
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 63

202 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1189 33 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

With an omni-selector of 090? on a VOR indicator and the directional phase


lagging the reference pahse by 280°, the VOR indicator will show

fly right - FROM

fly right - TO

fly left - TO

fly right -- FROM

203 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 300 AviaExam2294 11/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A ground feature appears 30° to the left of the centre line of the CRT of an
airborne weather radar. If the heading of the aircraft is 355° (M) and the
magnetic variation is 15° East, the true bearing of the aircraft from the feature
is:

160°

220°

310°

130°

204 62.6.1 Doppler Typ: MC 301 AviaExam2295 11/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An apparent increase in the transmitted frequency in doppler which is


proportional to the transmitter velocity will occur when:

the transmitter moves towards the receiver

the transmitter moves away from the receiver

the receiver moves towards the transmitter

both transmitter and receiver move towards each other


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 64

205 61.1.1 The solar system Typ: MC 302 AviaExam2303 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

Which is the highest latitude listed below at which the sun will rise above the
horizon and set every day?

66°

68°

72°

62°

206 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 303 AviaExam2304 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

060-003.jpg
The UTC of sunrise on 6 December at WINNIPEG (Canada) (49°50'N 097°30'W)
is:

1413

0930

0113

2230

207 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1192 34 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft heading 340?M at 30 nm from a VOR station on a bearing of 142?M


from the station. 146?M is selected on the OBS and the TO/FROM indicator
shows FROM. The indication on a 5 dot VOR indicator is

2 dots fly right

2 dots fly left

4 dots fly right

4 dots fly left


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 65

208 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 304 AviaExam2305 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

060-004.htm
When it is 1000 Standard Time in Kuwait, the Standard Time in Algeria is:

0800

1200

1300

0700

209 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 305 AviaExam2306 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The value of magnetic variation:

has a maximum of 180°

must be 0° at the magnetic equator

varies between a maximum of 45° East and 45° West

cannot exceed 90°

210 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 306 AviaExam2307 8/15/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

When decelerating on a westerly heading in the Northern hemisphere, the


compass card of a direct reading magnetic compass will turn:

clockwise giving an apparent turn toward the south

anti-clockwise giving an apparent turn towards the south

clockwise giving an apparent turn towards the north

anti-clockwise giving an apparent turn towards the north

211 62.1.3.0.5 errors and accuracy Typ: MC 1195 35 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Factors which could affect the accuracy of a VOR are

site error, propagation error, airborne equipment error, interference


error

site error, propagation error, night effect, airborne equipment error

propagation error, site error, pilotage error, transmitting power

all of the options


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 66

212 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 307 AviaExam2309 8/19/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The constant of cone of a Lambert conformal conic chart is quoted as 0.3955.


At what latitude on the chart is earth convergency correctly represented?

23°18'

66°42'

68°25'

21°35'

213 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 308 AviaExam2310 8/19/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert Conformal chart the distance between meridians 5° apart along


latitude 37° North is 9 cm. The scale of the chart at that parallel approximates:

1: 5 000 000

1: 3 750 000

1: 2 000 000

1: 6 000 000

214 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 309 AviaExam2311 8/19/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The Great Circle bearing from A (70°S 030°W) to B (70°S 060°E) is


approximately:

132°(T)

048°(T)

090°(T)

312°(T)
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 67

215 62.1.3.0.6 factors affecting range Typ: MC 1198 36 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The factors that could affect the range of a VOR are

transmission power, transmitter height, designated operational


coverage, night effect

designated operational coverage, transmitter height, receiver height,


transmission power, terrain

transmission power, frequency in use, emission type, transmitter height,


receiver height, terrain

emission type, designated frequency, elevation

216 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 310 AviaExam2312 9/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

In a navigation chart a distance of 49 NM is equal to 7 cm. The scale of the


chart is approximately:

1: 1 300 000

1: 700 000

1: 130 000

1: 7 000 000

217 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 311 AviaExam2313 9/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

At 60° N the scale of a direct Mercator chart is 1: 3 000 000.


What is the scale at the equator?

1: 6 000 000

1: 3 000 000

1: 3 500 000

1: 1 500 000
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 68

218 62.1.3.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1201 37 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If one needle of an RMI is tuned to a VOR and the other to an NDB at the same
site the needles will

point in exactly the same direction

differ by the amount of drift

point different directions at different times

point in different directions because of a difference in variation

219 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 312 AviaExam2314 9/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the chart distance between longitudes 179°E and 175°W on a direct
Mercator chart with a scale of 1: 5 000 000 at the equator?

133 mm

106 mm

167 mm

72 mm

220 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 313 AviaExam2315 9/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The total length of the 53°N parallel of latitude on a direct Mercator chart is
133 cm. What is the approximate scale of the chart at latitude 30°S?

1: 25 000 000

1: 30 000 000

1: 18 000 000

1: 21 000 000

221 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 314 AviaExam2316 9/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A Lambert conformal conic projection, with two standard parallels:

the scale is only correct along the standard parallels

shows all great circles as straight lines

the scale is only correct at parallel of origin

shows lines of longitude as parallel straight lines


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 69

222 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1204 38 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When the VOR OBS meter indicates TO and the deviation indicator is
centered, the aircraft is always

on the reciprocal of the radial identified on the course selector

inbound TO the VOR station

on the radial identified on the course selector

none of the options

223 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 315 AviaExam2317 9/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the constant of the cone for a Lambert conic projection whose
standard parallels are at 50°N and 70°N?

0.866

0.941

0.500

0.766

224 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 316 AviaExam2318 9/16/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The constant of the cone, on a Lambert chart where the convergence angle
between longitudes 010°E and 030°W is 30°, is:

0.75

0.40

0.50

0.64

225 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 318 AviaExam2320 9/20/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A line drawn on a chart which joins all points where the value of magnetic
variation is zero is called an:

agonic line

aclinic line

isogonal

isotach
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 70

226 62.1.3.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1207 39 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

After passing overhead a VOR station, the deviation indicator shows a half
scale deviation to the right. If the deflection remains constant for a period of
time then

the aircraft is flying closer to the radial

the aircraft is flying further from the radial

the OBS is erroneously sets on the reciprocal heading

the VOR is offset

227 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 319 AviaExam2321 9/20/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The horizontal component of the earth's magnetic field:

is stronger closer to the magnetic equator

weakens with increasing distance from the magnetic poles

weakens with increasing distance from the nearer magnetic pole

is approximately the same at all magnetic latitudes less than 60°

228 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 320 AviaExam2322 9/20/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft in the northern hemisphere makes an accurate rate one turn to the
right/starboard. If the initial heading was 330°, after 30 seconds of the turn the
direct reading magnetic compass should read:

less than 060°

060°

more than 060°

more or less than 060° depending on the pendulous suspension used


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 71

229 62.1.3.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1209 39 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

After passing overhead a VOR station, the deviation indicator shows a half
scale deviation to the right. If the deflection remains constant for a period of
time then

the aircraft is flying closer to the radial

the aircraft is flying further from the radial

the OBS is erroneously sets on the reciprocal heading

the VOR is offset

230 62.1.3.0.4 range Typ: MC 1210 40 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft heading 050?T is tracking on a VOR radial. 068 is set on the OBS
and the TO/FROM indicator reads TO. Variation is 10?W. The ADF reading
from an NDB at the VOR station is

352?R

240?R

188?R

008?R

231 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 321 AviaExam2323 9/20/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

When turning right from 330°(C) to 040°(C) in the northern hemisphere, the
reading of a direct reading magnetic compass will:

under-indicate the turn and liquid swirl will increase the effect

over-indicate the turn and liquid swirl will decrease the effect

under-indicate the turn and liquid swirl will decrease the effect

over-indicate the turn and liquid swirl will increase the effect
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 72

232 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 322 AviaExam2324 9/20/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

When accelerating on an easterly heading in the Northern hemisphere, the


compass card of a direct reading magnetic compass will turn:

clockwise giving an apparent turn toward the north

clockwise giving an apparent turn toward the south

anti-clockwise giving an apparent turn toward the north

anti-clockwise giving an apparent turn toward the south

233 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 325 AviaExam2327 10/5/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The chart distance between meridians 10° apart at latitude 65° North is 3.75
inches. The chart scale at this latitude approximates:

1: 5 000 000

1: 6 000 000

1: 2 500 000

1: 3 000 000

234 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 326 AviaExam2328 10/5/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert conformal conic chart, with two standard parallels, the quoted
scale is correct:

along the two standard parallels

in the area between the standard parallels

along the parallel of origin

along the prime meridian

235 61.1.5.0.1 units of distance and height Typ: MC 1213 71 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The scale of a chart is 1: 550,000 at the Equator. The Chart length to the
nearest inch between meridians 7o apart at the equator is :

41

22

63

56
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 73

236 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1214 72 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is true of a Great Circle?

Its plane passes through the centre of the earth.

The smaller arc of it represents the shortest distance between two


points on the earth.

It is the path radio waves follow over the earth.

All the responses.

237 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 327 AviaExam2329 10/7/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

A direct reading compass should be swung when:

there is a large, and permanent, change in magnetic latitude

there is a large change in magnetic longitude

the aircraft is stored for a long period and is frequently moved

the aircraft has made more than a stated number of landings

238 61.3.1.0.1 mercator Typ: MC 1215 73 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The scale on a Mercator Chart;

Remains constant with change of latitude

Varies with longitude

Varies with change in latitude.

Remains constant with change of either latitude or longitude.

239 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 328 AviaExam2330 10/7/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The direct reading magnetic compass is made aperiodic (dead beat) by:

keeping the magnetic assembly mass close to the compass point and by
using damping wires

using the lowest acceptable viscosity compass liquid

using long magnets

pendulous suspension of the magnetic assembly


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 74

240 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 329 AviaExam2331 10/7/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The annunciator of a remote indicating compass system is used when:

synchronising the magnetic and gyro compass elements

compensating for deviation

setting local magnetic variation

setting the 'heading' pointer

241 61.1.2.0.3 latitude, difference of latitude Typ: MC 1216 74 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The latitude of a plane is its angular distance;

N/S of the Equator to a maximum of 180o N/S

E/W of the Equator to a maximum of 90o E/W.

E/W of the Equator to a maximum of 180o E/W

N/S of the Equator to a maximum of 90o N/S.

242 61.4.1.0.8 DR-position, fix Typ: MC 1217 75 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to aircraft positions which of the following statements is correct?

An air position is the current position of the aircraft.

Dead-reackoning(DR) position is the position directly beneath the


aircraft

A pinpoint is the ground position of the aircraft obtained by direct


observation of the ground.

An air position is the position directly beneath the aircraft

243 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 330 AviaExam2333 10/7/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

The convergence factor of a Lambert conformal conic chart is quoted as


0.78535.
At what latitude on the chart is earth convergency correctly represented?

51°45'

52°05'

80°39'

38°15'
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 75

244 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1218 76 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In a Lambert Conformal Chart, chart convergency equals earth convergency


at the ;

Poles

Parallels of Origin

Standard Parallels

Equator.

245 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 331 AviaExam2334 10/7/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

At 47° North the chart distance between meridians 10° apart is 5 inches.
The scale of the chart at 47° North approximates:

1: 6 000 000

1: 8 000 000

1: 3 000 000

1: 2 500 000

246 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1219 77 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The formula for Earth Conversion Angle is;

2 * Earth Convergency

½ d.long * sine Mean Latitude.

d.long * sine Mean Latitude.

d.long * cosine Mean Latitude.

247 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 332 AviaExam2335 10/7/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Direct Mercator chart a great circle will be represented by a:

curve concave to the equator

complex curve

curve convex to the equator

straight line
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 76

248 61.1.5.0.3 relationship between nautical Typ: MC 1220 78 10/29/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of these statements about Departure is false?

It is measured in nautical miles.

It is the distance E/W between two meridians.

Its formula is d.long * Sine Lat.

Its value at the Equator is d.long converted to minutes of arc

249 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 333 AviaExam2337 11/3/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft in the northern hemisphere is making an accurate rate one turn to


the right.
If the initial heading was 135°, after 30 seconds the direct reading magnetic
compass should read:

more than 225°

225°

less than 225°

more or less than 225° depending on the pendulous suspension used

250 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 334 AviaExam2338 11/3/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

When accelerating on a westerly heading in the northern hemisphere, the


compass card of a direct reading magnetic compass will turn:

anti-clockwise giving an apparent turn towards the north

anti-clockwise giving an apparent turn towards the south

clockwise giving an apparent turn towards the north

clockwise giving an apparent turn towards the south


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 77

251 61.4.2.0.8 wind velocity Typ: MC 1221 68 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Use your CRP 5 to work out the ground speed and Heading given the
following data.

W/V 030°/30ts TAS 180kts Track 086°

Hdg 078° G/S 162 kts

Hdg 042° G/S 330 kts

Hdg 102° G/S 180 kts

Hdg 086° G/S 180 kts

252 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 335 AviaExam2341 11/3/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert Conformal Conic chart earth convergency is most accurately


represented at the:

parallel of origin

north and south limits of the chart

standard parallels

Equator

253 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1222 69 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements is true of a great circle?

It is the path radio waves travel over the earth.

The smaller arc of it represents the shortest distance between two


points on the earth.

Its plane passes through the centre of the earth.

All the responses are correct.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 78

254 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1223 70 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of these statements about a small circle is false?

The smaller arc of it does not represent the shortest distance between
two points on the earth.

All lines of latitude are small circles.

Its plane does not pass through the centre of the earth.

A radio wave never follows a small circle path.

255 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 336 AviaExam2342 11/3/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Transverse Mercator chart, scale is exactly correct along the:

meridian of tangency

Equator, parallel of origin and prime vertical

datum meridian and meridian perpendicular to it

prime meridian and the equator

256 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1224 71 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of these statements about Earth Convergency is false?

It is the angle that any two meridians converge on the earth.

It is the angle that a great circle bearing changes as it passes across


two meridians.

The angle of earth convergency between meridians at the Equator is


d.long.

The angle between two meridians at the pole is d.long.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 79

257 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 337 AviaExam3202 6/28/1994 Pkt.: 1.00

An RMI slaved to a remote indicating compass has gone unserviceable and is


locked on to a reading of 090°. The tail of the VOR pointer shows 135°. The
available information from the VOR is:

Radial 135°, relative bearing unknown

Radial unknown, relative bearing 225°

Radial unknown, relative bearing 045°

Radial 315°, relative bearing unknown

258 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 338 AviaExam3557 8/21/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

265 US-GAL equals? (Specific gravity 0.80)

803 kg

862 kg

895 kg

940 kg

259 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1225 72 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The formula for Earth Conversion Angle is:

2 * Earth Convergency.

½ d.long * sine Mean Latitude.

d.long * sine Mean Latitude.

d.long * cosine Mean Latitude.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 80

260 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1226 73 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Point C is in the same hemisphere as D. The great circle bearing of D from C


is 044°(T) and C from D is 220°(T). The hemisphere of C and D, and the rhumb
line track from C to D are:

Hemisphere RL C to D

Northern 040°

Southern 042°

Southern 044°

Northern 046°

261 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 339 AviaExam3558 8/21/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

730 FT/MIN equals:

3.7 m/sec

5.2 m/sec

1.6 m/sec

2.2 m/sec

262 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1227 74 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The great circle track from A (20°00'N 010°00'W) to B (40°00'N 010°00'E) is


060° (T).

The great circle track from B to A is:

240° (T)

245° (T)

250° (T)

230° (T)
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 81

263 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 340 AviaExam3559 8/24/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

How long will it take to fly 5 NM at a groundspeed of 269 Kt ?

1 MIN 07 SEC

1 MIN 55 SEC

2 MIN 30 SEC

0 MIN 34 SEC

264 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 341 AviaExam3560 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft travels 2.4 statute miles in 47 seconds.


What is its groundspeed?

160 kt

183 kt

209 kt

131 kt

265 61.3.2.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1228 76 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is not a property of a conformal chart?

Meridians and latitude lines cut at right angles.

Scale is constant in one direction and has its greatest expansion or


contraction perpendicular to that direction.

The shape of small areas is correctly represented.

Area is correctly represented.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 82

266 61.3.3.0.4 measuring tracks and distances Typ: MC 1229 77 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Chart A has a scale of 1:250,000.


Chart B has a scale of 1:500,000.

Which of these statements is correct?

Chart A has a larger scale because earth distance is larger.

Chart B has a larger scale because earth distance is larger.

Chart A has a larger scale because earth distance is smaller.

Chart B has a larger scale because earth distance is smaller.

267 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 342 AviaExam3562 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft flies a great circle track from 56° N 070° W to 62° N 110° E.
The total distance travelled is?

3720 NM

5420 NM

1788 NM

2040 NM

268 61.3.2.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1230 79 11/3/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert Conformal chart, scale is correct at the:

Parallel of origin.

Pole of projection.

Parallel of tangency.

Standard parallels.

269 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 343 AviaExam3568 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Isogrives are lines that connect positions that have:

the same grivation

the same horizontal magnetic field strength

the same variation

O° magnetic dip
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 83

270 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 344 AviaExam3570 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the meaning of the term "standard time" ?

It is the time set by the legal authorities for a country or part of a country

It is the time zone system applicable only in the USA

It is an expression for local mean time

It is another term for UTC

271 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1231 1 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A rhumbline is a line

Joining places of equal latitude

Cutting great circles at the same angle on the earth's surface .

Of constant direction on the earth's surface.

Joining places of the same convergency.

272 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 345 AviaExam3572 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the local mean time, position 65°25'N 123°45'W at 2200 UTC?

1345

2200

0615

0815

273 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1054 AviaExam3837 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The wavelength of a non-directional beacon (NDB) at a frequency of 300 kHz


is:

1000 metres.

100 metres.

10 metres.

1 metre.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 84

274 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1232 2 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft flies from position A (54º 00' N 035 º 10' E) to position B (24 º 20' N
010 º 00' E).
What is the earth's convergency at position B?

15.9 º

39.2 º

25.2 º

90 º

275 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 346 AviaExam3573 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An Agonic line is a line that connects:

positions that have 0° variation

positions that have the same variation

points of equal magnetic dip

points of equal magnetic horizontal field strength

276 61.1.2.0.3 latitude, difference of latitude Typ: MC 1233 3 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft flies from position A (54º 00' N 035 º 10' E) to position B (24 º 20' N
010 º 00' E).
find the change in longitude .

25.2 º W

25.2 º E

10 º E

10 º W
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 85

277 61.1.2.0.3 latitude, difference of latitude Typ: MC 1234 6 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft flies on a track of 270 º T . If the heading is 268 º M and local


deviation is 2 º E, what is the compass reading ?

270 º C

268 º C

266 º C

272 º C

278 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 347 AviaExam3575 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

When is the magnetic compass most effective?

About midway between the magnetic poles

In the region of the magnetic South Pole.

In the region of the magnetic North Pole.

On the geographic equator

279 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1055 AviaExam3841 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The minimum airborne equipment required for operation of a the VHF


direction finder is a:

VHF transmitter-receiver operating in the 118 MHz to 136 MHz range.

VHF compass operating in the 200 kHz to 1750 kHz range.

VHF receiver operating in the 118 MHz to 136 MHz range.

cathode-ray tube.

280 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 348 AviaExam3576 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

When an aircraft on a westerly heading on the northern hemisphere


accelerates, the effect of the acceleration error causes the magnetic compass
to:

indicate a turn towards the north

lag behind the turning rate of the aircraft

indicate a turn towards the south

to turn faster than the actual turning rate of the aircraft


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 86

281 61.1.4.0.2 magnetic poles, isogonals Typ: MC 1235 7 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Agonic lines are lines joining places of

Equal elevation

Equal variation

Zero variation

equal temperature

282 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1056 AviaExam3845 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The VHF Omnirange (VOR) uses the following wavelengths:

metric.

hectometric.

decimetric.

centimetric.

283 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1236 8 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Southern hemisphere ,an NDB bears 180 º relative. The aircraft heading
is 270 º C and deviation is 2 º E. Variation at the NDB is 20 º W and at the
aircraft position is 18 º W. Earth convergence between the NDB and the
aircraft is 8 º. What is the True bearing to be plotted on a Lambert chart if the
drift is 2 º Port ?

272 º T

090 º T

262 º T

270 º T

284 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 349 AviaExam3582 8/28/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the ISA temperature value at FL 330?

-51°C

-56°C

-66°C

-81°C
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 87

285 61.4.4 Determination of DR position Typ: MC 350 AviaExam3592 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True Track = 095°,
TAS = 160 kt,
True Heading = 087°,
GS = 130 kts;
Calculate W/V

057°/36 kt

237°/36 kt

307°/36 kt

124°/36 kt

286 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1057 AviaExam3847 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The Instrument Landing System (ILS) uses the following wavelengths:

metric.

hectometric.

decimetric.

centimetric.

287 62.1.1.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1237 9 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An NDB co- located with a VOR bears 178 º relative in the Northern
Hemisphere . The aircraft heading is 300 º C .The deviation is 1 º W, variation
at the VOR is 10 º E and at the aircraft's position is 15 º E . If the OBS selector
is set at 090 º with the indicator indicating 'TO' and the pointer centred , what
do you plot on a Mercator chart ? Use conversion factor of 0.8 and change in
longitude 5 º W.

297 º T

129 º T

278 º T

280 º T
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 88

288 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 351 AviaExam3593 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS 487kt,
FL 330,
Temperature ISA + 15.
Calculate the MACH Number?

0.81

0.84

0.76

0.78

289 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1058 AviaExam3848 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) uses the following wavelengths:

decimetric.

hectometric.

metric.

centimetric.

290 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1238 10 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An NDB co- located with a VOR bears 178 º relative in the Northern
Hemisphere . The aircraft heading is 300 º C .The deviation is 1 º W, variation
at the VOR is 10 º E and at the aircraft's position is 15 º E . If the OBS selector
is set at 090 º with the indicator indicating 'TO' and the pointer centred , what
do you plot on a Mercator chart ? Use conversion factor of 0.8 and change in
longitude 5 º W ,what is the heading True of the aircraft ?

300ºT

314ºT

309ºT

310ºT
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 89

291 61.4.2.0.8 wind velocity Typ: MC 1239 11 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Using your CRP 5 work out the wind velocity given the following data. TAS
225 kt , Heading (HDG)344º, Track made good (TMG) 347º And Ground speed
G/S 274 kt .

200/30

20/30

180/50

360/50

292 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1059 AviaExam3850 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The VHF direction finder uses the following wavelengths:

metric.

hectometric.

decimetric.

centimetric.

293 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 352 AviaExam3598 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
M 0.80,
OAT -50°C,
FL 330,
GS 490 kt,
VAR 20°W,
Magnetic heading 140°,
Drift is 11° Right.
Calculate the true W/V?

020°/95 kt

025°/47 kt

200°/95 kt

025°/45 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 90

294 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 353 AviaExam3599 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Pressure Altitude 29000 FT,
OAT -55°C.
Calculate the Density Altitude?

27500 FT

31000 FT

33500 FT

26000 FT

295 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1240 12 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In the topographical charts used for Navigation which one would you expect
to have the scale expanding away from the Equator ?

Mercator projection

Lambert conformal conic projection

Transverse Mercator projection

All the options.

296 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1060 AviaExam3852 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The high Altitude Radio Altimeter uses the following wavelengths:

decimetric.

metric.

hectometric.

myriametric.

297 61.3.3.0.2 methods of indicating scale and relief Typ: MC 1241 13 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Hachuring when used on charts is normally shown as

Lines drawn on a chart joining areas of equal height above mean sea
level.

Combination of different colours for different heights.

Short lines radiating from high ground

Black dots with adjacent numerals.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 91

298 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 354 AviaExam3600 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Compass Heading 090°,
Deviation 2°W,
Variation 12°E,
TAS 160 kt.
Whilst maintaining a radial 070° from a VOR station,
the aircraft flies a ground distance of 14 NM in 6 MIN.
What is the W/V °(T)?

160°/50 kt

340°/25 kt

340°/98 kt

155°/25 kt

299 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1061 AviaExam3853 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The Low Altitude Radio Altimeter uses the following wavelengths:

centimetric.

myriametric.

decimetric.

metric.

300 61.4.1.0.1 track Typ: MC 1242 14 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is on a heading 232º while flying on a track of 246º from point A to


B.
What would be the heading for the aircraft to fly on the reciprocal of its track
from B to A ?

052º

066º

80º

114º
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 92

301 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 355 AviaExam3603 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The VOR system is limited to about 1° of accuracy. One degree at 200 NM


represents a width of:

3.5 NM

2.0 NM

2.5 NM

3.0 NM

302 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1062 AviaExam3854 9/5/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The Automatic Direction Finder uses the following wavelengths:

hectometric or kilometric.

metric.

decimetric.

centimetric.

303 61.1.2.0.5 use of latitude and longitude Typ: MC 1243 15 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Taking the circumference of the earth as 21600 NM at the Equator , what is the
distance between two longitudes one degree apart at 45 N or S of the Equator
?

30 NM

42 NM

60 NM

2700 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 93

304 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 356 AviaExam3605 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is "homing" to a radio beacon whilst maintaining a relative bearing


of zero.
If the magnetic heading decreases, the aircraft is experiencing:

right drift

left drift

zero drift

a wind from the west

305 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1244 16 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The angle between the great circle and the rhumb line drawn between two
points and measured at either point is known as ___________angle.

Drift

Convergency

Conversion

Track error

306 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 357 AviaExam3606 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An NDB is on a relative bearing of 316° from an aircraft.


Given:
Compass heading 270°
At aircraft deviation 2°W, Variation 30°
At station Variation 28°E,
Calculate the true bearing of the NDB from the aircraft

254°

252°

072°

074°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 94

307 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 358 AviaExam3608 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

How many NM would an aircraft travel in 1 MIN 45 SEC if GS is 135 kt?

3.94

2.36

3.25

39.0

308 61.3.3.0.4 measuring tracks and distances Typ: MC 1245 17 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying from point X to Y and the distance between is shown on a


map to be 32 inches apart on a chart with a scale 1 :530,000. The flight time of
the aircraft between the two points is 52 minutes .Find the ground speed of
the aircraft .

218 kt

189 kt

164 kt

269 kts

309 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 359 AviaExam3609 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Parallels of latitude on a Direct Mercator chart are:

parallel straight lines unequally spaced

parallel straight lines equally spaced

arcs of concentric circles equally spaced

straight lines converging above the pole

310 61.1.2.0.5 use of latitude and longitude Typ: MC 1246 18 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What is departure ?

Distance between meridians , cosine latitude times sixty (cos lat *60 )

Distance between latitudes cosine meridian times sixty (cos mer*60)

Distance between meridians sine latitude times sixty( sine lat *60 )

Distance between the Equator and the latitude (60 * cosine latitude).
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 95

311 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 360 AviaExam3610 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

A chart has the scale 1: 1 000 000. From A to B on the chart measures 1.5
inches (one inch equals 2.54 centimetres), the distance from A to B in NM is:

20.6

38.1

44.5

54.2

312 61.4.1.0.2 heading (compass, magnetic, true, grid) Typ: MC 1247 19 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying between E and F 230 NM . After flying 80 NM a fix is


obtained which is 12 NM left of track . What is alteration of heading required
to fly direct to F ?

14.2ºR

13.8ºR

11ºR

4.8ºR

313 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1248 21 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following properties must an orthomorphic chart possess ?

Scale correct and constant at all points , shapes correctly drawn and
world wide coverage.

Scale correct and constant at all points ,similar bearings as measured


on the earth and meridians and latitudes cutting at 90

Fit C6 of sheets , coverage world wide and shapes correctly drawn.

Areas correct relative to each other , both great circles and rhumb lines
are straight lines and shapes correctly drawn.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 96

314 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 361 AviaExam3611 8/29/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Contour lines on aeronautical maps and charts connect points:

having the same elevation above sea level

with the same variation

having the same longitude

of equal latitude

315 61.1.5.0.2 conversion from one unit to another Typ: MC 1249 22 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The scale of a map is 1 :780,000. What is the Chart length representing 217
KM on the earth ?

15.2 cm

7.8 cm

6.2 cm

27.8 cm

316 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 362 AviaExam3613 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

A Rhumb line is:

a line on the surface of the earth cutting all meridians at the same angle

the shortest distance between two points on a Polyconic projection

any straight line on a Lambert projection

a line convex to the nearest pole on a Mercator projection

317 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 363 AviaExam3614 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

A straight line on a Lambert Conformal Projection chart for normal flight


planning purposes:

is approximately a Great Circle

is a Loxodromic line

is a Rhumb line

can only be a parallel of latitude


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 97

318 61.3.3.0.4 measuring tracks and distances Typ: MC 1250 23 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If a flight is to be made from point M at 47ºS ,75ºW to point N at 47º S 34ºW .


Using the shortest route , find the track at N .

105ºT

75ºT

90ºT

85ºT

319 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1251 24 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the conversion angle between point P 56ºN03º E and point Q


52ºN06ºW if the rhumb line track is 233ºT

1.5º

2.5º

3.5º

4.0º

320 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 364 AviaExam3616 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Fuel flow per HR is 22 US-GAL, total fuel on board is 83 IMP GAL.


What is the endurance?

4 HR 32 MIN

3 HR 12 MIN

3 HR 53 MIN

2 HR 15 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 98

321 61.3.1.0.3 polar stereographic Typ: MC 1252 25 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A projection where by a flat surface ,cylinder or cone is placed conveniently


on the surface of the reduced earth and a source of light at the centre of the
earth projects the graticule on the paper is referred to as :-

Transverse Mercator

Lambert conformal

Mercator

Polar stereographic

322 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 365 AviaExam3617 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the ratio between the litre and the US-GAL ?

1 US-GAL equals 3.78 litres

1 litre equals 3.78 US-GAL

1 US-GAL equals 4.55 litres

1 litre equals 4.55 US-GAL

323 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 366 AviaExam3619 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
true track is 348°,
drift 17° left,
variation 32° W,
deviation 4°E.
What is the compass heading?

033°

007°

359°

337°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 99

324 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1253 26 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following is not considered an essential property of plotting


charts :-

Orthomorphism

Rhumb lines are not necessarily represented by straight lines

Distances should be measured easily

Adjacent sheets should fit

325 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1254 27 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following topographical maps would be used to produce


topos of regions having their greatest east -west extent

Lambert

Mercator

Polar stereographic

Transverse Mercator

326 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 367 AviaExam3621 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The circumference of the earth is approximately:

21600 NM

43200 NM

5400 NM

10800 NM

327 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 368 AviaExam3622 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Isogonic lines connect positions that have:

the same variation

0° variation

the same elevation

the same angle of magnetic dip


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 100

328 61.1.5.0.2 conversion from one unit to another Typ: MC 1255 28 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If a distance of 13.7 NM on the earth is represented by one inch on the map ,


what is the map scale ?

1 : 798910

1 : 898,913

1:100,000

1:999,552

329 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 369 AviaExam3625 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The Local Mean Time at longitude 095°20'W, at 0000 UTC, is:

1738:40 previous day

0621:20 previous day

1738:40 same day

0621:20 same day

330 61.4.2.0.7 airspeed Typ: MC 1256 29 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying at FL 330 ,temp. Deviation +20ºC rectified air speed 160 kt.

Using a flight computer find the True Air Speed.

300 kt

326 kt

316 kt

282 kt

331 61.4.2.0.5 conversions Typ: MC 1257 30 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying at FL 330 ,temp. Deviation +20ºC rectified air speed 160 kt.
Using a flight computer find the mach number.

0.62

0.42

0.72

0.47
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 101

332 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 370 AviaExam3626 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

5 HR 20 MIN 20 SEC corresponds to a longitude difference of:

80°05'

81°10'

75°00'

78°45'

333 61.4.2.0.5 conversions Typ: MC 1258 31 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying at FL 330 ,temp. Deviation +20ºC rectified air speed 160 kt.
Using a flight computer find the Local Speed of Sound.

560.1

569.6

605.2

385.2

334 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 371 AviaExam3627 8/30/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the value of the magnetic dip at the magnetic south pole ?

90°

45°

60°

335 61.1.2.0.5 use of latitude and longitude Typ: MC 1259 32 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

From A(50º 00' N 05º 00' E) an aircraft flies a great circle track of 000º (T) for
600 NM to B. It then turns onto a rhumb line track of 270º (T) and flies for 455
NM to C. The longitude of C is:

20º 10' E

2 º 35' W

01º 12 ' E

10º10' W
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 102

336 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 372 AviaExam4159 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

In which frequency band do VOR transmitters operate?

VHF

UHF

SHF

EHF

337 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 373 AviaExam4164 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

A Primary radar operates on the principle of:

pulse technique

transponder interrogation

phase comparison

continuous wave transmission

338 61.1.3.0.4 standard times Typ: MC 1260 33 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

At 1205 Z aircraft A is 76 NM behind aircraft B. Aircraft A is flying at 180 kt and


aircraft B at 140 kt.
At what time will aircraft A pass aircraft B ?

1217 Z

1340 Z

1425 Z

1359 Z

339 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 374 AviaExam4166 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the wavelength of an NDB transmitting on 375 kHZ?

800 m

8000 m

8m

80 m
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 103

340 61.3.2.0.1 direct mercator Typ: MC 1261 34 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

To which bearings must radio bearings be converted before plotting on the


Mercator's Projection Chart?

From rhumb line bearings to great circle bearings.

From great circle bearings to rhumb line bearings.

To rhumb line bearings or to great circle bearings depending on whether


it is in the Northern or Southern Hemisphere.

They need not be converted to any other bearing.

341 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 375 AviaExam4167 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

In which frequency band does an ILS glide slope transmit?

UHF

VHF

SHF

EHF

342 61.1.5.0.2 conversion from one unit to another Typ: MC 1262 35 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Chart A has a scale of 1:250,000.


Chart B has a scale of 1:500,000.

Which of these statement is correct?

Chart A has a larger scale because earth distance is larger.

Chart B has a larger scale because earth distance is larger.

Chart A has a larger scale because earth distance is smaller.

Chart B has a larger scale because earth distance is smaller.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 104

343 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 376 AviaExam4168 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is likely to have the greatest effect on ADF accuracy?

Interference from other NDBs, particularly at night

Frequency drift at the ground station

Interference from other NDBs, particularly during the day

Mutual interference between aircraft aerials

344 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1263 36 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The formula for Earth Conversion Angle is:

2 x distance latitude sine mean longitude.

½ distance longitude x sine Mean Latitude.

distance longitude x sine Mean Latitude.

½ distance longitude x cosine Mean Latitude

345 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 1264 37 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Mercator chart, a great circle is represented as a:

Straight line

Curve concave to the Equator.

Curve concave to the nearer pole.

Curve concave to the meridians.

346 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 377 AviaExam4169 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Assuming a five dot display on either side of the CDI on the ILS localiser
cockpit display, what does each of the dots represent approximately ?:

0.5 degrees

1.5 degrees

2.5 degrees

2.0 degrees
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 105

347 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1265 38 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert Conformal chart, scale is correct at the:

Parallel of origin.

Pole of projection.

Parallel of tangency.

Standard parallels.

348 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 378 AviaExam4172 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Outer marker transmits on 75 MHz and has an aural frequency of:

400 Hz

1300 Hz

2000 Hz

3000 Hz

349 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1266 39 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The rhumb line track from X to Y is 302(T). The great circle bearing of X from
Y is 128(T).
The great circle bearing of Y from X is:

308 (T)

305(T)

299(T)

296(T)

350 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 379 AviaExam4175 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to enter a phantom waypoint that is designated by a VOR/DME simple


RNAV system, the VOR/DME

does not have to be in range when entered but must be when used

does not have to be in range when entered or used

must be in range

has to be positively identified by one of the pilots


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 106

351 61.1.2.0.3 latitude, difference of latitude Typ: MC 1267 40 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The latitude of a plane is its angular distance.

N/S of the Equator to a maximum of 180° N/S.

E/W of the Equator to a maximum of 90° E/W

N/S of the Equator to a maximum of 90° N/S.

E/W of the Equator to a maximum of 180° E/W.

352 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 380 AviaExam4176 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying on a heading of 270°(M). The VOR OBS is also set to 270°
with the full left deflection and FROM flag displayed.
In which sector is the aircraft from the VOR ground station?

NW

SW

SE

NE

353 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1268 2 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the frequency is 9.2 GHz, what is its wave length?

3.3 cm

33 cm

3300 cm

330 cm

354 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 381 AviaExam4180 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An Omni-bearing selector (OBS) shows full deflection to the left when within
range of a serviceable VOR.
What angular deviation are you from the selected radial?

10° or more

less than 10°

1.5° or more

2.5 or more
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 107

355 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 382 AviaExam4182 9/25/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

A pilot flying an NDB approach must achieve a tracking accuracy within………


of the published approach track.

+/-5°

+/-10°

+/-2.5°

+/-2°

356 21.2.5.3.3 propagation with the frequency bands Typ: MC 1269 3 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Side bands in relation to radio signals are:

Additional frequencies which occur whenever an audio frequency is


modulated by a frequency higher than itself.

The resultant frequency when a carrier is modulated by a frequency


higher than itself.

Only additional frequencies when the audio frequency is amplitude


modulated by a carrier frequency lower than it.

Additional frequencies which occur whenever a carrier is modulated by


a frequency lower than itself particularly audio frequencies.

357 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1270 4 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The importance of knowledge of polarization is said to lie in the orientation of


the receiver aerial. This is because.

A horizontal aerial will efficiently receive the magnetic component of a


vertically polarized signal.

A vertical aerial will efficiently receive both the magnetic and electrical
components that spin about the axis of advance.

A perfectly horizontal aerial will not receive any electrical component


from a vertically polarized signal.

Only a circularly polarized signal will be received by a horizontal aerial.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 108

358 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 383 AviaExam4193 9/26/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the minimum number of satellites required by a GPS in order to obtain


a three dimensional fix?

359 62.6.3 Loran-C Typ: MC 384 AviaExam4196 9/26/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

In which navigation system does the master station transmit a continuous


string of pulses on a frequency close to 100 kHz?

Loran C

GPS

Decca

Doppler

360 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1271 5 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Amplitude modulation of frequency fm carried on a transmitted frequency fc


produces:

2 sidebands ( fc + fm ) and ( fc - fm )

One sideband fc + fm

3 sidebands (fc + fm), fc and ( fc - fm )

a multiple of sidebands and a greater bank width.

361 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1272 6 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The factors that determine the ranges available from the sky waves are:

Transmission power, diffraction, critical angle and angle of incidence.

Critical angle, refraction, angle of incidence and diffraction.

Transmission power, conductivity of earth's surface and angle of


incidence.

Transmission power, depth of penetration, critical angle and angle of


incidence.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 109

362 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 385 AviaExam4529 6/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The term drift refers to the wander of the axis of a gyro in:

the horizontal plane

the vertical plane

the vertical and horizontal plane

any plane

363 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 386 AviaExam4853 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the colour sequence when passing over an Outer, Middle and Inner
Marker beacon?

blue - amber - white

amber - white - green

white - amber - blue

blue - green - white

364 62.6.3 Loran-C Typ: MC 387 AviaExam4854 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements concerning LORAN-C is correct?

It is a hyperbolic navigation system that works on the principle of


differential range by pulse technique

It is a navigation system based on secondary radar principles; position


lines are obtained in sequence from up to eight ground stations

It is a hyperbolic navigation system that works on the principle of range


measurement by phase comparison

It is a navigation system based on simultaneous ranges being received


from a minimum of four ground stations
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 110

365 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1274 8 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Surface attenuation of a ground wave

Decreases as frequency decreases.

Decreases as frequency increases.

Increases as frequency decreases.

Either decreases as frequency increases or increases as frequency


decreases.

366 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 388 AviaExam4855 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

In a Satellite-Assisted Navigation system (GNSS/GPS) a position line is


obtained by:

timing the period that is taken for a satellite's transmission to reach the
aircraft's receiver

the aircraft's receiver measuring the phase angle of the signal received
from a satellite in a known position

timing the period that is taken for a transmission from the aircraft's
transmitter/receiver to reach and return from a satellite in a known
position

the aircraft's receiver measuring the time difference between signals


received from a minimum number of satellites

367 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1275 9 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A radio wave usually increases in speed when crossing a coastline leaving


the land and passing over the sea resulting in

A change in frequency.

A change in wave length.

A change in modulation.

No change in either frequency or wave length.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 111

368 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 389 AviaExam4856 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

In which frequency band do Satellite-Assisted Navigation systems


(GNSS/GPS) provide position information that is available to civil aircraft?

UHF

SHF

EHF

VHF

369 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 390 AviaExam4857 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The two main design functions of Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR) Mode
S are:

air to ground and ground to air data link communications and improved
ATC aircraft surveillance capability

collision avoidance using TCAS II and improved long range (HF)


communication capability.

continuous automatic position reporting using Global Positioning


System (GPS) satellites and collision avoidance using TCAS II

the elimination of ground to air communications and the introduction of


automatic separation between aircraft using TCAS II

370 62.1.6 MLS Typ: MC 391 AviaExam4858 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following is an advantage of a Microwave Landing System


(MLS) compared with an Instrument Landing System (ILS)?

It is insensitive to geographical site and can be installed at sites where it


is not possible to use an ILS

It does not require a separate azimuth (localiser) and elevation (azimuth)


transmitter

The installation does not require to have a separate method (marker


beacons or DME) to determine range

There is no restriction on the number of ground installations that can be


operated because there is an unlimited number of frequency channels
available
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 112

371 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 392 AviaExam4859 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

A frequency of 10 GHz is considered to be the optimum for use in an airborne


weather radar system because:

the larger water droplets will give good echoes

greater detail can be obtained at the more distant ranges of the smaller
water droplets

static interference is minimised

enables the aircraft to detect clear air turbulence

372 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1279 13 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The coast line lies in a North South direction. An aircraft over the sea
receives an ADF bearing of 270° Relative. The true bearing of the aircraft from
the NDB is

Greater than 090°.

Less than 090°.

090°.

Could be greater or less depending on whether the aircraft is flying


North or south.

373 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1280 15 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The ICAO NDB frequency band is

200 khz to 500 khz.

200 khz to 800 khz.

200 khz to 1750 khz.

200 khz to 112 Mhz.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 113

374 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 393 AviaExam4861 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the minimum number of satellites required for the NAVSTAR/GPS to


carry out two dimensional operation?

375 62.1.3.0.5 errors and accuracy Typ: MC 1281 16 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following errors is not associated with the VOR?

Site error.

Propagation error.

Interference error.

Quadrantal error.

376 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 394 AviaExam4862 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

In an Airborne Weather Radar the areas of greatest turbulence are usually


indicated on the screen by:

colour zones of red and magenta

blank areas where there is no colour

colour zones of green and yellow

areas which are coloured black

377 62.1.6 MLS Typ: MC 395 AviaExam4864 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The azimuth transmitter of a Microwave Landing System (MLS) provides a


fan-shaped horizontal approach zone which is usually:

+ or - 40° of the runway centre-line

+ or - 50° of the runway centre-line

+ or - 60° of the runway centre-line

+ or - 30° of the runway centre-line


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 114

378 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1282 17 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the variable phase of a VOR transmission lags the reference signal by 75°
the bearing to the VOR is

075°.

255°.

285°.

105°.

379 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 396 AviaExam4865 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is a complete list of airborne weather radar antenna


stabilisation axes?

roll and pitch

roll, pitch and yaw

pitch and yaw

roll and yaw

380 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1283 18 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

You are flying ECHO 1, BE 19 inbound to NV VOR on radial 136°. VOR


variation is
4° W. Variation at aircraft's position is 7° W. If drift is 3° Right, the initial
heading to maintain the radial is

313° M.

143° M.

133° M.

319° M.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 115

381 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 397 AviaExam4866 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

In an Airborne Weather Radar that has a colour cathode ray tube (CRT)
increasing severity of rain and turbulence is generally shown by a change of
colour from:

green to yellow to red

yellow to amber to blue

green to red to black

yellow to orange to red

382 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1284 19 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The datum of a Radio Magnetic Indicator RMI is

True North.

Magnetic North.

Grid North.

Compass North.

383 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 398 AviaExam4867 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

When an aircraft is operating its Secondary Surveillance Radar in Mode C an


air traffic controller's presentation gives information regarding the aircraft's
indicated flight level in increments of:

100 FT

200 FT

250 FT

150 FT
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 116

384 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 399 AviaExam4871 9/27/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements concerning the variable, or directional,


signal of a conventional VOR is correct?

The rotation of the variable signal at a rate of 30 times per second gives
it the characteristics of a 30 Hz amplitude modulation

The transmitter varies the amplitude of the variable signal by 30 Hz each


time it rotates

The transmitter changes the frequency of the variable signal by 30 Hz


either side of the allocated frequency each time it rotates

The receiver adds 30 Hz to the variable signal before combining it with


the reference signal

385 62.5.4 Types of area navigation system inputs Typ: MC 400 AviaExam4876 10/19/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following combinations is likely to result in the most accurate


Area Navigation (RNAV) fixes?

DME/DME

VOR/DME

NDB/VOR

VOR/VOR

386 62.2.2.0.6 factors affecting range Typ: MC 1288 23 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following factors is not an advantage of the primary radar?

The system needs low power as the signals are only doing a one way
journey.

It is a self contained system requiring no external assistance.

A common aerial may be used for both transmission and reception.

For ground installation, sharp accurate narrow beams can be produced


by increasing the aerial size.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 117

387 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 401 AviaExam4877 10/19/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

A radar facility transmitting at a Pulse Recurrence Frequency (PRF) of 1200


pulses/second will have a maximum unambiguous range of approximately:

69 NM

135 NM

270 NM

27 NM

388 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1289 24 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Cathode Ray tube (CRT) which component is used to emit electrons?

2nd anode.

Cathode.

Grid.

Y plates.

389 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 402 AviaExam4878 10/19/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The maximum theoretical range at which an aircraft at FL230 may receive


signals from a VOR facility sited at mean sea level is:

190 NM

230 NM

170 NM

151 NM

390 62.2.2.0.4 range Typ: MC 1290 25 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If a radio signal takes 450 µs to travel from A to B, what is the distance of B


from A in nautical miles?

72.9 NM

405 NM

64.8 NM

145.8 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 118

391 62.6.3 Loran-C Typ: MC 403 AviaExam4879 10/19/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following correctly gives the principle of operation of the Loran
C navigation system?

Differential range by pulse technique

Frequency shift between synchronised transmissions

Differential range by phase comparison

Phase comparison between synchronised transmissions

392 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 404 AviaExam5112 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The main reason that day and night, throughout the year, have different
duration, is due to the:

inclination of the ecliptic to the equator

earth's rotation

relative speed of the sun along the ecliptic

gravitational effect of the sun and moon on the speed of rotation of the
earth

393 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 1291 26 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The time taken for a signal to travel from an aircraft to a DME beacon and
back is 1620 micro seconds (µs). The range of the aircraft is

142 NM

131 NM

250 NM

810 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 119

394 62.5.5.0.2 advantages and disadvantages Typ: MC 1292 27 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When a VOR and DME stations are co-located, and the ident is heard only 3
times in every 30 seconds, this means that

Both the VOR and DME are working normally.

Only the DME is working while the VOR is unserviceable.

Only the DME is unserviceable while the VOR is operating normally.

Both the VOR and DME status cannot be properly be defined by means
of ident.

395 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 405 AviaExam5113 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The lines on the earth's surface that join points of equal magnetic variation
are called:

isogonals

isotachs

isogrives

isoclines

396 62.5.5.0.1 principle of operation Typ: MC 1293 28 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Associated VOR and DME is the term given to

VOR and DME facilities that are frequency paired and the aerials are a
maximum of 100 feet apart and the facilities used for Approach
purposes.

VOR and DME facilities that are not frequency paired but aerials are a
maximum of 100 feet apart and used for Approach purposes.

VOR and DME facilities that are frequency paired and aerials are a
minimum of 2000 feet apart and have the same ident and used for
enroute Navigation.

VORand DME facilities that have different idents but are not more than
2000 feet apart and serve the same area.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 120

397 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 406 AviaExam5114 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft departing A(N40º 00´ E080º 00´) flies a constant true track of 270º at
a ground speed of 120 kt.
What are the coordinates of the position reached in 6 HR?

N40º 00´ E064º 20´

N40º 00´ E070º 30´

N40º 00´ E060º 00´

N40º 00´ E068º 10´

398 62.1.4.0.4 range Typ: MC 1294 29 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The DME frequency band is

Very Low Frequency band.

Very high frequency band.

Ultra high frequency band.

Medium to High frequency band.

399 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 407 AviaExam5119 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The parallels on a Lambert Conformal Conic chart are represented by:

arcs of concentric circles

straight lines

parabolic lines

hyperbolic lines

400 62.1.4.0.5 errors and accuracy Typ: MC 1295 30 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The greatest error between ground distance to the DME station and the
indicated distance is

High altitudes close to the DME station.

High altitude at maximum range.

Low altitudes at maximum range.

Low altitudes close to the DME station.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 121

401 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 408 AviaExam5121 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The ICAO definition of ETA is the:

estimated time of arrival at destination

actual time of arrival at a point or fix

estimated time of arrival at an en-route point or fix

estimated time en route

402 62.2.4.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1296 31 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The range of the Secondary Surveillance Radar is

50 nm

100 nm

200 nm

1000 nm

403 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 409 AviaExam5122 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft travels 100 statute miles in 20 MIN, how long does it take to travel
215 NM?

50 MIN

100 MIN

90 MIN

80 MIN

404 62.2.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1297 32 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When operating the Airborne Weather Radar (AWR) the function switch WEA
or WX is used for

Examine the most turbulent areas in clouds by using an iso echo


display.

Ground mapping by the use of a cosecant beam.

A narrow conical pencil beam used in conjunction with tilt control to


give heights of clouds, and ground mapping at long range.

The normal position for observing clouds using a narrow conical pencil
beam.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 122

405 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 410 AviaExam5123 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 220 kt;
Magnetic course = 212 º,
W/V 160 º(M)/ 50kt,
Calculate the GS?

186 kt

290 kt

246 kt

250 kt

406 62.2.3.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1298 33 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Weather radar operates in the SHF band because

Narrow beams can be transmitted only on SHF.

Of the long ranges needed to know the weather ahead.

The scanner dish required by SHF is small and can fit into the nose of an
aircraft.

The short wave lengths produced by SHF give excellent reflections from
large water droplets.

407 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 411 AviaExam5125 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
FL250,
OAT -15 ºC,
TAS 250 kt.
Calculate the Mach No.?

0.40

0.42

0.44

0.39
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 123

408 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1299 34 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A radio altimeter indicates the height above the ground of the

Aerials.

Main landing gear.

The pressure altimeter static vent.

The vertical stabilizer of the tail.

409 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 412 AviaExam5128 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

During a low level flight 2 parallel roads that are crossed at right angles by an
aircraft. The time between these roads can be used to check the aircraft:

groundspeed

position

track

drift

410 62.1.5.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1300 35 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The type of emission used by ILS is

AIA

J3E

A 9W

A8W

411 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 413 AviaExam5129 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Assuming zero wind, what distance will be covered by an aircraft descending


15000 FT with a TAS of 320 kt and maintaining a rate of descent of 3000
FT/MIN?

26.7 NM

19.2 NM

38.4 NM

16.0 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 124

412 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 414 AviaExam5130 10/9/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Magnetic track = 315 º,
HDG = 301 º(M),
VAR = 5ºW,
TAS = 225 kt,
The aircraft flies 50 NM in 12 MIN.
Calculate the W/V(°T)?

190 º/63 kt

355 º/15 kt

195 º/61 kt

195 º/63 kt

413 62.1.5.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1301 36 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Transmission of the ILS ident occurs on the

Glide slope transmission.

Fan markers transmission.

Localizer transmission.

All the options are correct.

414 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 415 AviaExam5145 10/16/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency of an SSR ground transmission is:

1030 +/- 0.2 MHz

1050 +/- 0.5 MHz

1090 +/- 0.3 MHz

1120 +/- 0.6 MHz


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 125

415 62.1.5.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1302 37 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The ICAO standard height of the ILS reference point is

10 feet.

15 feet.

20 feet.

50 feet.

416 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 416 AviaExam5150 10/24/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following gives the best information about the progress of a
flight between 2 en-route waypoints from a RNAV equipment?

ETO

ETD

ATA

Elapsed time on route.

417 62.1.5.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1303 38 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The ILS inner, middle and outer marker frequencies are

Variable but paired and are found in various flight guides.

Found in the Aeronautical Publications for each particular ILS approach


plates.

Between 110.3 MHZ and 118 MHZ.

They are all 75 MHZ.

418 62.6.1 Doppler Typ: MC 417 AviaExam5154 10/24/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

The Doppler Navigation System is based on:

radar principles using frequency shift

radio waves refraction in the ionosphere

Doppler VOR (DVOR) Navigation System

phase comparison from ground station transmissions


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 126

419 62.1.5.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1304 39 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The maximum safe deviation from the ILS glide path during an approach
using a 5 dot CDI is

2 dots fly up.

4 dots fly up.

2½ dots fly up

5 dots fly up.

420 62.7.1 Ground Proximity Warning System Typ: MC 1305 40 11/18/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The GPWS operates in a height range above ground level of

50 ft to 2 450 ft

200 ft to 2 500 ft

100 ft to 1 800 ft.

300 ft to 900 ft.

421 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 418 AviaExam5583 2/23/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

One purpose of compass calibration is to determine the deviation:

on any heading

on a given heading

at any latitude

on N, S, E and W only

422 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 419 AviaExam5758 1/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The main factor which determines the minimum range that can be measured
by a pulsed radar is pulse:

length

amplitude

repetition rate

frequency
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 127

423 21.2.5.1.2 wave length, ampl., phase angle, freq. Typ: MC 1306 1 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The peak value of current either positive or negative is known as;

Amplitude

Frequency

Cycle

wavelength

424 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1307 2 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A transmitter with a vertical aerial or antenna produces;

a horizontally polarised radio wave.

a vertically polarised radio wave.

a loop type wave.

either a)or b) depending on receiver antenna.

425 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 420 AviaExam5759 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Ignoring pulse length, the maximum pulse repetition frequency


(PRF) that can be used by a primary radar facility to detect targets
unambiguously to a range of 200 NM is:
(pps = pulses per second)

405 pps

782 pps

308 pps

375 pps

426 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 421 AviaExam5760 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is the ICAO allocated frequency band for ADF
receivers?

200 - 1750 kHz

255 - 455 kHz

300 - 3000 kHz

200 - 2000 kHz


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 128

427 62.1.5.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1308 3 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The ILS-glide slope employs frequencies under the;

HF band

SHF band

UHF band

VHF band

428 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 422 AviaExam5761 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An island appears 30° to the left of the centre line on an airborne weather
radar display. What is the true bearing of the aircraft from the island if at the
time of observation the aircraft was on a magnetic heading of 276° with the
magnetic variation 12°W?

054°

318°

234°

038°

429 62.1.1.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1309 4 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An NDB emits radio waves of 400 M wavelength.

What is the frequency?

75 KHZ

75 MHZ

750 MHZ

750 KHZ
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 129

430 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 423 AviaExam5762 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

ICAO specifications are that range errors indicated by Distance Measuring


Equipment (DME) should not exceed:

+ or - 0.25 NM plus 1.25% of the distance measured

+ or - 0.5 NM or 3% of the distance measured whichever is the greater

+ or - 1.25 NM plus 0.25% of the distance measured

+ or - 0.25 NM plus 3% of the distance measured up to a maximum of 5


NM

431 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1310 5 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Peak amplitude for an audio frequency is 4.5 cm and that of the carrier wave
is 5 cm.
Calculate the depth of modulation.

90%

100%

111%

4.5%

432 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 424 AviaExam5763 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to obtain an ADF bearing on a system using sense and loop aerials,
the:

signal must be received by both the sense and loop aerials

sense aerial must be tuned separately

mode selector should be switched to 'loop'

BFO switch must be selected to 'ON'


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 130

433 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1311 6 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is an advantage of using Amplitude Modulation over


Frequency Modulation?

Less modulating power is required when using AM.

Less complex transmitters are used to propagate the AM signals.

AM transmissions utilise a narrower bandwidth.

AM LHF band free from static.

434 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 425 AviaExam5764 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Every 10 kt decrease in groundspeed, on a 3° ILS glidepath, will require an


approximate:

decrease in the aircraft's rate of descent of 50 FT/MIN

increase in the aircraft's rate of descent of 50 FT/MIN

decrease in the aircraft's rate of descent of 100 FT/MIN

increase in the aircraft's rate of descent of 100 FT/MIN

435 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1312 7 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying at FL 330 .

What is the maximum range that a signal can be received from a transmitter at
pressure altitude 5500 ft ?

309.7 NM

115.4 NM

450.3 NM

319.7 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 131

436 62.1.6 MLS Typ: MC 426 AviaExam5765 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

MLS installations notified for operation, unless otherwise stated, provide


azimuth coverage of:

+ or - 40° about the nominal courseline out to a range of 20 NM

+ or - 20° about the nominal courseline out to a range of 20 NM

+ or - 40° about the nominal courseline out to a range of 30 NM

+ or - 20° about the nominal courseline out to a range of 10 NM

437 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1313 8 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A common source of static is;

Noise

Lightning

Turbulence

Cold front

438 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 427 AviaExam5767 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Complete the following statement. Aircraft Surface movement Radar operates


on frequencies in the (i) .......... band employing an antenna that rotates at
approximately (ii) .......... revolutions per minute; it is (iii) ......... possible to
determine the type of aircraft from the return on the radar screen.

(i) SHF (ii) 60 (iii) sometimes

(i) EHF (ii) 30 (iii) never

(i) SHF (ii) 10 (iii) always

(i) EHF (ii) 100 (iii) never


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 132

439 62.1.4.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1314 9 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A radio magnetic Indicator ( RMI ) displays a warning flag which indicates a


compass failure .
The radio bearing pointers;

Cannot be used.

Can be used to home to an NDB only.

Can be used to home to an NDB and a VOR station

Can be used to track to a VOR only.

440 61.4.3.0.1 heading Typ: MC 1315 10 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

QUJ is the;

Magnetic track the aircraft has to steer to reach a station.

True track from a station to the aircraft position.

True track the aircraft has to steer to reach a station.

Magnetic track from a station to aircraft position.

441 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 428 AviaExam5769 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Instrument Landing Systems (ILS) Glide Paths provide azimuth coverage (i)
….. ° each side of the localiser centre-line to a distance of (ii) …. NM
minimum from the threshold.

(i) 8 (ii) 10

(i) 25 (ii) 17

(i) 35 (ii) 25

(i) 5 (ii) 8
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 133

442 62.1.2.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1316 11 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

At 0800 Z a relative bearing of 250° is obtained from an NDB. At 0806 Z a


relative bearing of 272° is obtained from the same NDB .

If the aircraft altered heading at 0806 Z to fly directly to the NDB , how long
would it take to get to the beacon ?

12 minutes

16 minutes

60 minutes

36 minutes

443 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 429 AviaExam5770 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The rate of descent required to maintain a 3.25° glide slope at a groundspeed


of 140 kt is approximately:

760 FT/MIN

850 FT/MIN

670 FT/MIN

700 FT/MIN

444 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 430 AviaExam5771 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Airborne weather radars are generally based on the use of:

primary radar in the SHF band

primary radar in the UHF band

secondary radar in the SHF band

secondary radar in the VHF band


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 134

445 62.1.2.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1318 13 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft heading 290° M has an ADF reading of 305°R from an NDB .ATC
instructs the pilot to intercept the NDB 020° QDR outbound at an angle of 50°,
the intercept heading and relative bearing is;

Intercept heading Relative bearing

330°M 50°

235°M 230°

235°M 50°

330°M 230°

446 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 431 AviaExam5772 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The pencil shaped beam of an airborne weather radar is used in preference to


the mapping mode for the determination of ground features:

beyond 50 to 60 NM because more power can be concentrated in the


narrower beam

beyond 100 NM because insufficient antenna tilt angle is available with


the mapping mode

beyond 150 NM because the wider beam gives better definition

when approaching coast-lines in polar regions

447 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1319 14 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The designation of the HF radio receiver is;

A3B

A3A

J3E

J3S
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 135

448 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 432 AviaExam5775 3/1/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Factors liable to affect most NDB/ADF system performance and reliability


include:

static interference - night effect - absence of failure warning system

static interference - station interference - latitude error

height error - station interference - mountain effect

coastal refraction - lane slip - mountain effect

449 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 433 AviaExam5777 3/5/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The maximum pulse repetition frequency (PRF) that can be


used by a primary radar facility in order to detect targets
unambiguously at a range of 50 NM is:
(pps = pulses per second)

1620 pps

3240 pps

610 pps

713 pps

450 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1320 15 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When tracking outbound from an NDB with the proper drift correction
established, which direction will the head of the ADF bearing pointer be
deflected?

To the windward side of the aircraft's tail.

To the downwind side of the aircraft's tail.

To the downwind side of the aircraft's nose.

To the windward side of the aircraft's nose.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 136

451 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 434 AviaExam5782 3/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Ignoring pulse length and fly-back, a radar facility designed to have a


maximum unambiguous range of 50 km will have a PRF (pulses per second)
of:

3000

6000

167

330

452 62.1.5.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1321 16 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

ILS glide path 3 ° TAS 150 kt, headwind component 15 kt.

What is the approximate rate of descent?

400 ft /min

675 ft /min

975 ft /min

1005 ft/ min

453 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 435 AviaExam5783 3/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which combination of characteristics gives best screen picture in a primary


search radar?

short pulse length and narrow beam

long pulse length and wide beam

long pulse length and narrow beam

short pulse length and wide beam


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 137

454 62.5.5.0.1 principle of operation Typ: MC 1322 17 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Inbound to a VOR on a radial 060° you are cleared to hold south of the VOR on
160° radial non- standard pattern.

Which of holding pattern entry should be used?

Parallel

Direct

Teardrop

Offset

455 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 436 AviaExam5784 3/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following lists are all errors that affect the accuracy and
reliability of the Satellite-Assisted Navigation system (GNSS/GPS)?

Satellite clock; satellite ephemeris; atmospheric propagation

Satellite mutual interference; satellite ephemeris; atmospheric


propagation

Satellite to ground time lag; atmospheric propagation; satellite clock

Satellite mutual interference; frequency drift; satellite to ground time lag

456 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1323 18 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the full scale deflection of the CDI when tuned to a localiser ?

5° either side of course

10° either side of course

2.5° either side of course

7.5° either side of course


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 138

457 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 437 AviaExam5789 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

In ISA conditions, approximately what is the maximum theoretical range at


which an aircraft at FL210 may expect to receive signals from a VOR facility
sited 340 feet above mean sea level ?

204 NM

245 NM

163 NM

183 NM

458 62.1.5.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1324 19 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What are the normal minimums for a CAT 1 ILS approach with all components
operative?

RVR 600 m and a Decision height of 300 ft

RVR 600 m and a Decision height of 200 ft

RVR 600 m and a Decision height of 100 ft

RVR 600 m and a Decision height of 400 ft

459 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 438 AviaExam5790 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

What are the modulation frequencies of the two overlapping lobes that are
used on an ILS approach?

90 HZ 150 HZ

75kHZ 135 kHZ

328mHZ 335 mHZ

63 mHZ 123 mHZ


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 139

460 21.2.5.1 Basic principles Typ: MC 1325 20 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Amplitude modulated at frequency 10 KHZ carried on a transmitted frequency


5 MHZ produces;

2 sidebands of transmission at 4990 Khz and 500 Khz

2 sidebands of transmissions at 510 Khz and 510 Mhz

2 sidebands of transmission at 510 Khz and 5000 Khz

2 sidebands of transmission at 5010 Khz and 4990 Khz

461 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 439 AviaExam5791 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying a 3° glidepath and experiences a reduction in


groundspeed from 150 kt at the outer marker to 120 kt over the threshold. The
effect of this change in groundspeed on the aircraft's rate of descent will be a
decrease of approximately:

150 FT/MIN

250 FT/MIN

50 FT/MIN

100 FT/MIN

462 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1326 21 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the wavelength is 8 cm, the radio frequency is;

375 MHZ

37.5 GHZ

3.75 GHZ

37.5 MHZ
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 140

463 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 440 AviaExam5792 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The minimum range of a primary radar, using the pulse technique, is


determined by the (i)........ ; the maximum unambiguous range by the (ii).........

(i) pulse length (ii) pulse recurrence frequency

(i) transmission frequency (ii) transmitter power output

(i) pulse length (ii) length of the timebase

(i) transmission frequency (ii) pulse recurrence frequency

464 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1327 22 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is on a true bearing of 216° from a VOR station .The variation at the
station is 10° E and at the aircraft is 8° E, what is the phase difference
between the reference and the variable signals arriving in the aircraft's
receiver?

206°

216°

226°

200°

465 62.6.1 Doppler Typ: MC 441 AviaExam5795 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Due to 'Doppler' effect an apparent decrease in the transmitted frequency,


which is proportional to the transmitter's velocity, will occur when:

the transmitter moves away from the receiver

the transmitter and receiver move towards each other

the transmitter moves toward the receiver

there is no relative movement between the transmitter and the receiver


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 141

466 62.1.2.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1328 23 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A non-directional beacon transmits;

Horizontally polarised signals in the MF band

Vertically polarised signals in the LF band.

Horizontally polarised signals in the LF band.

Vertically polarised signals in the MF band.

467 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 442 AviaExam5797 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Signal reception is required from a minimum number of satellites that have


adequate elevation and suitable geometry in order for a Satellite-Assisted
Navigation System (GNSS/GPS) to carry out independent three dimensional
operation, Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) and to isolate
any faulty satellite and remove it from contributing to the navigation solution.
The number of satellites is:

468 21.2.5 Basic radio propagation theory Typ: MC 1329 24 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is heading 160°T, variation is 5°W. An NDB bears 110° R.

What is the QDM of the aircraft?

275° M

090° T

270° T

095° M
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 142

469 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 443 AviaExam5798 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A ground radar transmitting at a PRF of 1200 pulses/second will have a


maximum unambiguous range of approximately:

67 NM

135 NM

270 NM

27 NM

470 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1330 25 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is homing to a VOR whose variation is 5°W .The aircraft's position


variation is 4°W.

What is the initial heading if the aircraft maintains radial 253°and has a drift of
8°P?

250°M

073°M

065°M

081° M

471 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 444 AviaExam5801 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The principle of operation of an ILS localiser transmitter is based on two


overlapping lobes that are transmitted on (i).......... frequencies and carry
different (ii)..........

(i) the same (ii) modulation frequencies

(i) the same (ii) phases

(i) different (ii) modulation frequencies

(i) different (ii) phases


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 143

472 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1331 26 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Failure warning flag of the radio altimeter appears when;

Altitude exceeds 2500 ft

There is a signal transmission fault

Reflections are received from the airframe of the aircraft.

The aircraft descends below 500 ft

473 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 445 AviaExam5802 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Signal reception is required from a minimum number of satellites that have


adequate elevation and suitable geometry in order for a Satellite-Assisted
Navigation System (GPS) to carry out independent three dimensional
operation without the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)
function. The number of satellites is:

474 62.1.3.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1332 27 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If the 5 dot CDI is 1 (ONE) dot to the left with 090 selected in the OBS and the
FROM flag is showing, what radial is the aeroplane on?

092°

088°

272°

268°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 144

475 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 446 AviaExam5805 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Where, in relation to the runway, is the ILS localiser transmitting aerial


normally situated?

On the non-approach end of the runway about 300 m from the runway on
the extended centreline

At the approach end of the runway about 300 m from touchdown on the
centreline

At the non-approach end about 150 m to one side of the runway and 300
m along the extended centreline

At the approach end about 150 m to one side of the runway and 300 m
from touchdown

476 62.1.5.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1333 28 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The BLUE sector of the ILS approach path is modulated at;

50 Hz

90 Hz

150 Hz

110 Hz

477 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 447 AviaExam5806 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

In which mode of operation does the aircraft weather radar use a cosecant
radiation pattern.

MAPPING

CONTOUR

WEATHER

MANUAL
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 145

478 62.7.1 Ground Proximity Warning System Typ: MC 1334 29 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What alert signal is given on the GPWS Mode 3 to indicate a negative rate
climb after take off or go around?

Whoop whoop pull up

Terrain terrain

Glide slope

Don't sink

479 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 448 AviaExam5807 4/22/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

There are two NDBs, one 20 NM inland, and the other 50 NM inland from the
coast.
Assuming that the error caused by coastal refraction is the same for both
propagations, the extent of the error in a position line plotted by an aircraft
that is over water will be:

greater from the beacon that is 50 NM inland

the same from both beacons when the aircraft is on a relative bearing of
180° and 360°

greater from the beacon that is 20 NM inland

the same from both beacons when the aircraft is on a relative bearing of
090° and 270°

480 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 1335 30 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A radar has a maximum range of 180 NM. What is its Pulse Recurrence
Frequency?

450 PPS

900 PPS

274 PPS

137 PPS
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 146

481 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 449 AviaExam5811 4/16/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True track 180°
Drift 8°R
Compass heading 195°
Deviation -2°
Calculate the variation.

21°W

25°W

5°W

9°W

482 62.2.3.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1336 31 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft flying at an altitude of 6000 ft AGL picks a cloud formation on the


weather radar at a range of 45 NM. At a tilt angle of +5°the cloud just
disappears from the radar display. The beam width is 4°.

What is the height of the cloud top from the ground level?

13680 ft

6000 ft

19680 ft

26000 ft

483 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1337 32 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The radio altimeter works on the principle of;

Phase difference

Frequency modulation

Phase modulation

Amplitude modulation
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 147

484 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 450 AviaExam5812 4/16/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Compass deviation is defined as the angle between:

Magnetic North and Compass North

True North and Magnetic North

True North and Compass North

the horizontal and the total intensity of the earth's magnetic field

485 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 451 AviaExam5813 4/16/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True course 300°
drift 8°R
variation 10°W
deviation -4°
Calculate the compass heading.

306°

322°

294°

278°

486 62.1.4.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1338 33 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

If a DME beacon becomes saturated, it adjusts itself to give preference to;

Maximum of 27 aircraft irrespective of distance

Those aircraft that send signals faster irrespective of distance

The nearest aircraft

The farthest aircraft


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 148

487 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 452 AviaExam5815 4/16/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
true track 352°
variation 11° W
deviation is -5°
drift 10°R.
Calculate the compass heading?

358°

346°

018°

025°

488 62.1.3.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1339 34 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A receiver is moving away from a stationary transmitter at a speed of 380 m/s.

If the transmission wavelength is 4.3 cm, what is the Doppler frequency?

883.72 Hz

88.372 Hz

7 GHZ

8.8372 kHz

489 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 453 AviaExam5817 4/16/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
true track 070°
variation 30°W
deviation +1°
drift 10°R
Calculate the compass heading?

089°

091°

100°

101°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 149

490 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 1340 35 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What determines the maximum range of a radar set?

Transmission frequency

Pulse Recurrence Period

Pulse width

Pulse Recurrence Frequency

491 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 454 AviaExam5823 5/2/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The angle between True North and Magnetic North is called:

variation

deviation

compass error

drift

492 62.1.3.0.1 principles Typ: MC 1341 36 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the meaning of the term 'Radial ' with respect to VOR?

The magnetic bearing to a VOR station.

The True heading from the VOR station

The magnetic bearing from the VOR station

The True heading to a VOR station

493 22.1.4 Radio Altimeter Typ: MC 1342 37 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency of a radio altimeter is;

4300 MHz SHF

4300 MHz EHF

4250 MHz UHF

4250 MHz VHF


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 150

494 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 455 AviaExam5824 5/2/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Deviation applied to magnetic heading gives:

compass heading

true heading

magnetic course

magnetic track

495 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 456 AviaExam5826 5/2/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A nautical mile is:

1852 metres

1609 metres

1012 metres

1500metres

496 62.1.5.0.2 presentation and interpretation Typ: MC 1343 38 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The middle marker (MM) of an ILS system produces the following audio and
visual indications;

Dots with amber light

Dashes with blue light

Alternate dots and dashes with an amber light

Alternate dots and dashes with a blue light.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 151

497 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 457 AviaExam5828 5/2/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft flies the following rhumb line tracks and distances


from position 04°00'N 030°00'W:
600 NM South,
then 600 NM East,
then 600 NM North,
then 600 NM West.
The final position of the aircraft is:

04°00'N 029°58'W

04°00'N 030°02'W

04°00'N 030°00'W

03°58'N 030°02'W

498 21.2.5.3 Wave propagation Typ: MC 1344 39 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The critical angle of a sky wave transmission is defined as the angle between
the:

Horizontal at the transmitter and the first skywave.

Vertical at the transmitter and the first skywave.

Vertical at the receiver and the first skywave.

Vertical at the receiver and a skywave.

499 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 458 AviaExam5829 5/2/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the final position after the following rhumb line tracks and distances
have been followed from position 60°00'N 030°00'W?
South for 3600 NM,
East for 3600 NM,
North for 3600 NM,
West for 3600 NM.
The final position of the aircraft is:

60°00'N 090°00'W

60°00'N 030°00'E

59°00'N 060°00'W

59°00'N 090°00'W
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 152

500 62.1.4.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1345 40 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A DME beacon is normally capable of replying to a maximum of aircraft. The


approximate number is:

120

20

100

150

501 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1346 1 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following properties is NOT required by " TOPOS" in relation to


Topographical maps ?

Scale fairly constant and any scale error distributed evenly.

All bearings must be correct

Shapes are shown fairly correctly

Adjacent sheets fit accurately.

502 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 459 AviaExam5841 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 270 kt,
True HDG = 270°,
Actual wind 205°(T)/30kt,
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

6R - 259kt

6L - 256kt

6R - 251kt

8R - 259kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 153

503 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 460 AviaExam5842 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 270 kt,
True HDG = 145°,
Actual wind = 205°(T)/30kt.
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

6°L - 256 kt

6°R - 251 kt

8°R - 261 kt

6°R - 259 kt

504 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1348 2 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is NOT an expression of Chart Scale?

Statement in words

Representative fraction

Latitudinal Scale

Graduated Scale Line

505 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 461 AviaExam5843 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 470 kt,
True HDG = 317°
W/V = 045°(T)/45kt
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

5°L - 470 kt

3°R - 470 kt

5°L - 475 kt

5°R - 475 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 154

506 61.3.1.0.1 mercator Typ: MC 1349 3 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is true about the Mercator's projection?

The point of tangency is the equator

scale is constant from Equator to the Poles

Great Circles are straight lines

It is an equal area projection

507 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 462 AviaExam5844 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 140 kt,
True HDG = 302°,
W/V = 045°(T)/45kt
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

16°L - 156 kt

9°R - 143 kt

9°L - 146 kt

18°R - 146 kt

508 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 463 AviaExam5845 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 290 kt,
True HDG = 171°,
W/V = 310°(T)/30kt
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

4°L - 314 kt

4°R - 310 kt

4°R - 314 kt

4°L - 310 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 155

509 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1350 4 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to the Lamberts Projection which of the following statements is


FALSE?

The meridians of longitude and parallels of latitude cut at right angles.

It is assumed that the parallel of origin is midway between the standard


parallels.

The scale is only correct at the standard parallels.

The scale contracts outside the standard parallels.

510 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1351 5 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is NOT a characteristic of an orthomorphic chart?

Meridians and parallel cut at 90o

Scale must be correct in all directions at any one point.

Straight lines - both great circles and rhumb lines as straight lines.

Bearings - similar to bearings on earth.

511 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 464 AviaExam5847 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 485 kt,
True HDG = 226°,
W/V = 110°(T)/95kt.
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

9°R - 533 kt

7°R - 531 kt

9°R - 433 kt

8°L - 435 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 156

512 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1352 6 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following projections is Mathematical in construction?

Lambert_s Orthomorphic

Mercators

Polar Sterograhic

Transverse Mercators

513 61.4.4 Determination of DR position Typ: MC 465 AviaExam5848 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 472 kt,
True HDG = 005°,
W/V = 110°(T)/50kt.
Calculate the drift angle and GS.

6°L/490 kt

6°R/490 kt

6°L/402 kt

6°R/462 kt

514 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 466 AviaExam5849 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 190 kt,
True HDG = 085°,
W/V = 110°(T)/50kt.
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

8°L - 146 kt

7°L - 156 kt

4°L - 168 kt

4°L - 145 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 157

515 61.1.1.0.1 seasonal and apparent move of the sun Typ: MC 1353 7 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

According to Kepler_s law, the Earth is closest to the sun during

Perihelion

Aphelion

Solstice

Equinox

516 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 467 AviaExam5851 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 132 kt,
True HDG = 257°
W/V = 095°(T)/35kt.
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

4°R - 165 kt

2°R - 166 kt

4°L - 167 kt

3°L - 166 kt

517 61.3.3.0.1 plotting positions Typ: MC 1354 8 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In Navigation Plotting the symbol----------->>------------ denotes

Track made good between two ground positions

Heading and ground speed

Wind velocity

Track and ground speed.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 158

518 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 468 AviaExam5852 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 370 kt,
True HDG = 181°,
W/V = 095°(T)/35kt.
Calculate the true track and GS?

186 - 370 kt

176 - 370 kt

192 - 370 kt

189 - 370 kt

519 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1355 9 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The value of Chart Convergency in a mercator chart is

d.long x Sin mean latitude

d. long x Sin. Parallel of Origin

d. long x Cos latitude

Zero

520 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1356 10 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The rhumbline track from P to Q in the Southern Hemisphere is 079o(T) if the


convergency between P and Q is 6o, find the great circle bearing from Q to P.

265o

250o

256o

262o
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 159

521 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 469 AviaExam5853 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 375 kt,
True HDG = 124°,
W/V = 130°(T)/55kt.
Calculate the true track and GS?

123 - 320 kt

125 - 322 kt

126 - 320 kt

125 - 318 kt

522 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 470 AviaExam5854 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 125 kt,
True HDG = 355°,
W/V = 320°(T)/30kt.
Calculate the true track and GS?

005 - 102 kt

345 - 100 kt

348 - 102 kt

002 - 98 kt

523 61.1.5.0.2 conversion from one unit to another Typ: MC 1357 11 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A straight line drawn on a chart measures 14.1 inches and represents 275 Nm
on the earth.
The scale of this chart is:

1:1422 979

1: 7652961

1:1235746

14: 275
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 160

524 61.3.3.0.2 methods of indicating scale and relief Typ: MC 1358 12 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Chart R has a scale of 1:300,000. Chart S has a scale of 1:150,000 which of


these statements is correct?

Chart A has a larger scale because earth distance is larger

Chart S has a larger scale because earth distance is large.

Chart R has a larger scale because earth distance is smaller.

Chart S has a larger scale because earth distance is smaller.

525 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 471 AviaExam5855 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 198 kt,
HDG (°T) = 180,
W/V = 359/25.
Calculate the Track(°T) and GS?

180 - 223 kt

179 - 220 kt

181 - 180 kt

180 - 183 kt

526 61.4.2.0.8 wind velocity Typ: MC 1359 13 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Using your CRP 5 work out the Heading and Ground Speed given the
following data.

W\V 045/32 Kt TAS 215kts Track 096o

090o/194 kts

102o/37 kts

090o/237 kts

102o/196 kts.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 161

527 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 472 AviaExam5856 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 135 kt,
HDG (°T) = 278,
W/V = 140/20kt
Calculate the Track (°T) and GS?

283 - 150 kt

279 - 152 kt

272 - 121 kt

275 - 150 kt

528 62.1.3.0.3 coverage Typ: MC 1360 14 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the maximum Theoretical Range at which a VOR should be received


by an aircraft at FL 230? Assume the VOR is at pressure altitude 5000 ft.

101 Nm

282 Nm

278 Nm

150 Nm

529 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 473 AviaExam5857 5/6/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 225 kt,
HDG (°T) = 123°,
W/V = 090/60kt.
Calculate the Track (°T) and GS?

134 - 178 kt

134 - 188 kt

120 - 190 kt

128 - 180 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 162

530 61.1.3.0.3 LMT Typ: MC 1361 15 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

When the time is 0745 LMT at a place 65o 451 W, what is the time UTC is

0322 UTC

0745 UTC

0953 UTC

1208 UTC

531 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 474 AviaExam5858 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 480 kt,
HDG (°T) = 040°,
W/V = 090/60kt.
Calculate the Track (°T) and GS?

034 - 445 kt

028 - 415 kt

032 - 425 kt

036 - 435 kt

532 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 475 AviaExam5859 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 155 kt,
HDG (T) = 216°,
W/V = 090/60kt.
Calculate the Track (°T) and GS.

231 - 196 kt

224 - 175 kt

222 - 181 kt

226 - 186 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 163

533 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1362 16 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The great circle track from A (20°00'N 10°00'W) to B (40°00'N 10°00'E) is


060(T).
The great circle track from B to A is:

240(T)

245(T)

250(T)

230(T)

534 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 476 AviaExam5860 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 170 kt,
HDG(T) = 100°,
W/V = 350/30kt.
Calculate the Track (°T) and GS?

109 - 182 kt

091 - 183 kt

103 - 178 kt

098 - 178 kt

535 61.1.1.0.1 seasonal and apparent move of the sun Typ: MC 1363 17 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Sunrise or Sunset in the air almanac occur when

The sun's lower limb is on the horizon

The sun's upper limb is on the horizon

The sun's centre is on the horizon

During evening or morning twilights.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 164

536 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 477 AviaExam5861 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 235 kt,
HDG (T) = 076°
W/V = 040/40kt.
Calculate the drift angle and GS?

7R - 204 kt

7L - 269 kt

5L - 255 kt

5R - 207 kt

537 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1364 18 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Position D and E are in the same hemisphere the great circle bearing of E
from D is 076o(T) while the great circle bearing of D from E is 248o(T). Give
the hemisphere of the two positions and the rhumbline direction between D
and E,

Hemisphere of D and E Rhumbline direction

Northern 072oT

Southern 080oT

Northern 080oT

Southern 072oT

538 61.3.1.0.2 lambert conformal conic Typ: MC 1365 19 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert Conformal Chart a rhumbline is a

Straight line

Curve concave to the P of O

Curve concave to the nearer pole

Curve concave to the equator.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 165

539 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 478 AviaExam5862 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 440 kt,
HDG (T) = 349°
W/V = 040/40kt.
Calculate the drift and GS?

4L - 415 kt

2L - 420 kt

6L - 395 kt

5L - 385 kt

540 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 479 AviaExam5863 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 465 kt,
HDG (T) = 124°,
W/V = 170/80kt.
Calculate the drift and GS?

8L - 415 kt

3L - 415 kt

4L - 400 kt

6L - 400 kt

541 61.3.3.0.2 methods of indicating scale and relief Typ: MC 1366 20 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Of the following methods of showing relief on topographical charts, which


one uses a series of short lines?

Spot heights

Hachures

Contours

Layer tinting
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 166

542 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 480 AviaExam5864 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 95 kt,
HDG (T) = 075°,
W/V = 310/20kt.
Calculate the drift and GS?

9R - 108 kt

10L - 104 kt

9L - 105 kt

8R - 104 kt

543 61.3.3.0.1 plotting positions Typ: MC 1367 21 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The chart length between points X and Y is 20 inches on a chart of scale


1:550,000.
The flight time is 22 minutes. What is the approximate ground speed?

410 kts

280 kts

350 kts

450 kts.

544 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 481 AviaExam5865 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 140 kt,
HDG (T) = 005°,
W/V = 265/25kt.
Calculate the drift and GS?

10R - 146 kt

9R - 140 kt

11R - 142 kt

11R - 140 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 167

545 61.1.2.0.5 use of latitude and longitude Typ: MC 1368 22 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Taking the circumference of the earth as 21600 Nm at the Equator, what is the
distance between two longitudes two degrees apart at 75o N or S of the
Equator?

31 NM

116 NM

120 NM

100 NM

546 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1369 23 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

On a lambert Conformal Chart a straight line joining position A ( Longitude


20oE) to C (Longitude 15oW) passes through position B. The direction of the
line is 260o (T) at A and 272o at B. If chart convergence factor is 0.8, what are
the true rhumbline tracks from A to B and from A to C.

A to B A to

254 246

246 280

266 274

258 270

547 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 482 AviaExam5866 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 190 kt,
HDG (T) = 355°,
W/V = 165/25kt.
Calculate the drift and GS?

1L - 215 kt

1L - 225 kt

1R - 175 kt

1R - 165 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 168

548 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 483 AviaExam5867 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 230 kt,
HDG (T) = 250°,
W/V = 205/10kt.
Calculate the drift and GS?

2R - 223 kt

2L - 224 kt

1L - 225 kt

1R - 221 kt

549 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1371 25 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is not a method of finding conversion angle?

Douglas Protractor

ABAC scale on maps

½ ch long * sine means latitude

Ch long * sine mean latitude

550 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 484 AviaExam5868 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 205 kt,
HDG (T) = 180°,
W/V = 240/25kt.
Calculate the drift and GS?

6L - 194 kt

7L - 192 kt

3L - 190 kt

4L - 195 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 169

551 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1372 26 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

From Q ( 40o 00'N 05o 00 E) an aircraft flies a great circle track of 180 o T for
600 nm to R. It then turns onto a rhumbline track of 090o(T) and flies for 455
nm to S. The longitude of S is

13o46'E

03o14'W

23o46'W

02o14'E

552 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 485 AviaExam5869 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 250 kt,
HDG (T) = 029°,
W/V = 035/45kt.
Calculate the drift and GS?

1L - 205 kt

1R - 205 kt

1L - 265 kt

1R - 295 kt

553 61.1.2.0.2 convergency, conversion angle Typ: MC 1373 27 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements is true in relation to convergency?

At the Equator, convergency is equal to change of longitude.

It is the angle of inclination between two parallels of latitude.

The formula for convergency is ch long * cos mean latitude.

The amount of convergency depends on the latitude.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 170

554 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 486 AviaExam5870 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 132 kt,
HDG (T) = 053°,
W/V = 205/15kt.
Calculate the Track (°T) and GS?

050 - 145 kt

057 - 144 kt

052 - 143 kt

051 - 144 kt

555 61.1.4.0.2 magnetic poles, isogonals Typ: MC 1374 28 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Isoclinals are lines on a chart that

joint points having equal magnetic dip

are irregular and join areas where there is no variation

join points having equal variation

are also known as isogonic lines.

556 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 487 AviaExam5871 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 90 kt,
HDG (T) = 355°,
W/V = 120/20kt.
Calculate the Track (°T) and GS?

346 - 102 kt

006 - 95 kt

358 - 101 kt

359 - 102 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 171

557 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1375 29 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

A flight is to be made along the shortest route from Y at 66o N 08o W to Z at


62o N 07o E.
The rhumbline track is 143o (T) Sine 64o = 0.9
The great circle track at Z is

337o T

330o T

303o T

323o T

558 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 488 AviaExam5872 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 485 kt,
HDG (T) = 168°,
W/V = 130/75kt.
Calculate the Track (°T) and GS?

174 - 428 kt

173 - 424 kt

175 - 420 kt

175 - 432 kt

559 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 489 AviaExam5873 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 155 kt,
Track (T) = 305°,
W/V = 160/18kt.
Calculate the HDG (°T) and GS?

301 - 169 kt

305 - 169 kt

309 - 170 kt

309 - 141 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 172

560 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1376 30 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following is not a classification of projections according to


Properties that it has?

Orthomorphic

Zenithal

Equi distance

Equal area

561 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 1377 31 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to aircraft positions which of the following statements is correct?

An air position is the current position of the aircraft.

DR position is the position directly beneath the aircraft

A pinpoint is the ground position of the aircraft obtained by direct


observation of the ground.

Both B and C are correct.

562 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 490 AviaExam5874 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 130 kt,
Track (T) = 003°,
W/V = 190/40kt.
Calculate the HDG (°T) and GS?

001 - 170 kt

002 - 173 kt

359 - 166 kt

357 - 168 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 173

563 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1378 32 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Mercator Chart what bearing is to be plotted given a Radio bearing?

Compass bearing

Rhumbline bearing

Great Circle bearing

Magnetic bearing.

564 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 491 AviaExam5875 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 227 kt,
Track (T) = 316°,
W/V = 205/15kt.
Calculate the HDG (°T) and GS?

312 - 232 kt

311 - 230 kt

313 - 235 kt

310 - 233 kt

565 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 492 AviaExam5876 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 465 kt,
Track (T) = 007°,
W/V = 300/80kt.
Calculate the HDG (°T) and GS?

358 - 428 kt

001 - 435 kt

017 - 490 kt

357 - 502 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 174

566 61.3.3.0.5 plotting bearings Typ: MC 1379 33 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Mercator Chart given a VOR bears 075 o (M)TO, the convergency is 8o ,


the deviation is 6o E variation is 15o W at the station . What is the bearing to
plot in the Southern hemisphere?

236o T

244o T

274o T

266o T

567 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 493 AviaExam5877 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 200 kt,
Track (T) = 073°,
W/V = 210/20kt.
Calculate the HDG (°T) and GS?

077 - 214 kt

079 - 211 kt

075 - 213 kt

077 - 210 kt

568 61.3.3.0.1 plotting positions Typ: MC 1380 34 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

In a Lambert Conformal Chart convergency equals earth convergency at the :

Poles

P of O

Standard Parallels

Equator.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 175

569 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1381 35 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is true of a great circle ?

Its plane passes through the centre of the earth.

The smaller arc of it represents the shortest distance between two


points on the earth.

It is the path radio waves follow over the earth.

All the options are true.

570 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 494 AviaExam5878 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 200 kt,
Track (T) = 110°,
W/V = 015/40kt.
Calculate the HDG (°T) and GS?

099 - 199 kt

121 - 207 kt

121 - 199 kt

097 - 201 kt

571 61.1.2.0.1 great circle, small circle, rhumbline Typ: MC 1382 36 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The scale on a Mercator Chart:

Remains constant with change of latitude

Varies with longitude

Varies with change in latitude.

Remains constant with change of either latitude or longitude.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 176

572 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 495 AviaExam5879 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 270 kt,
Track (T) = 260°,
W/V = 275/30kt.
Calculate the HDG (°T) and GS?

262 - 241 kt

262 - 237 kt

264 - 241 kt

264 - 237 kt

573 61.3.1.0.4 transverse mercator (1.87) Typ: MC 1383 37 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is true in relation to traverse Mercator Charts?

Can only be used in the vicinity of the Equator

Will present the shape of surface features accurately provided a large


areas and a small scale is used.

Use a particular meridian central to the area depicted as its datum.

Rhumblines are straight lines.

574 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 496 AviaExam5880 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 307°,
TAS = 230 kt,
Track (T) = 313°,
GS = 210 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

260/30kt

257/35kt

255/25kt

265/30kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 177

575 61.1.5.0.1 units of distance and height Typ: MC 1384 38 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The scale of a chart is 1: 750,000 at the Equator.


The Chart length to the nearest inch between meridians 7o apart at the
equator is :

41

22

63

576 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 497 AviaExam5881 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 233°,
TAS = 480 kt,
Track (T) = 240°,
GS = 523 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

110/75kt

115/70kt

110/80kt

105/75kt

577 61.1.5.0.2 conversion from one unit to another Typ: MC 1385 39 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The scale of chart is 1:254,000 the chart length to the nearest cm which
represents 100 Nm on the earth is :

29

73
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 178

578 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 498 AviaExam5882 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 133°,
TAS = 225 kt,
Track (T) = 144°,
GS = 206 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

075/45kt

070/40kt

070/45kt

075/50kt

579 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 499 AviaExam5883 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 074°,
TAS = 230 kt,
Track (T) = 066°,
GS = 242 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

180/35kt

180/30kt

185/35kt

180/40kt

580 61.1.2.0.3 latitude, difference of latitude Typ: MC 1386 40 9/1/2008 Pkt.: 1.00

The latitude of a plane is its angular distance

N/S of the Equator to a maximum of 180o N/S

E/W of the Equator to a maximum of 90o E/W.

E/W of the Equator to a maximum of 180o E/W

N/S of the Equator to a maximum of 90o N/S.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 179

581 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 500 AviaExam5884 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 206°,
TAS = 140 kt,
Track (T) = 207°,
GS = 135 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

180/05kt

000/05kt

000/10kt

180/10kt

582 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 501 AviaExam5885 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 054°,
TAS = 450 kt,
Track (T) = 059°,
GS = 416 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

010/50kt

005/50kt

010/55kt

010/45kt

583 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 502 AviaExam5886 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 145°,
TAS = 240 kt,
Track (T) = 150°,
GS = 210 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

115/35kt

360/35kt

180/35kt

295/35kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 180

584 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 503 AviaExam5887 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 002°,
TAS = 130 kt,
Track (T) = 353°,
GS = 132 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

095/20kt

090/15kt

090/20kt

095/25kt

585 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 504 AviaExam5888 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True HDG = 035°,
TAS = 245 kt,
Track (T) = 046°,
GS = 220 kt.
Calculate the W/V?

340/50kt

335/45kt

335/55kt

340/45kt

586 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 505 AviaExam5889 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
course required = 085° (T),
Forecast W/V 030/100kt,
TAS = 470 kt,
Distance = 265 NM.
Calculate the true HDG and flight time?

075°, 39 MIN

076°, 34 MIN

096°, 29 MIN

095°, 31 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 181

587 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 506 AviaExam5890 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True course from A to B = 090°,
TAS = 460 kt,
W/V = 360/100kt,
Average variation = 10°E,
Deviation = -2°.
Calculate the compass heading and GS?

069° - 448 kt

068° - 460 kt

078° - 450 kt

070° - 453 kt

588 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 507 AviaExam5891 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

For a landing on runway 23 (227° magnetic) surface


W/V reported by the ATIS is 180/30kt.
VAR is 13°E.
Calculate the cross wind component?

22 kt

26 kt

15 kt

20 kt

589 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 508 AviaExam5892 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Maximum allowable tailwind component for landing 10 kt.
Planned runway 05 (047° magnetic).
The direction of the surface wind reported by ATIS 210°.
Variation is 17°E.
Calculate the maximum allowable wind speed that can
be accepted without exceeding the tailwind limit?

11 kt

18 kt

8 kt

15 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 182

590 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 509 AviaExam5893 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Maximum allowable crosswind component is 20 kt.
Runway 06, RWY QDM 063°(M).
Wind direction 100°(M)
Calculate the maximum allowable wind speed?

33 kt

37 kt

26 kt

25 kt

591 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 510 AviaExam5894 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True course A to B = 250°
Distance A to B = 315 NM
TAS = 450 kt.
W/V = 200°/60kt.
ETD A = 0650 UTC.
What is the ETA at B?

0736 UTC

0730 UTC

0810 UTC

0716 UTC

592 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 511 AviaExam5895 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 510 kt.


Distance A to B = 43 NM
What is the time (MIN) from A to B?

7
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 183

593 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 512 AviaExam5896 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 122 kt.


Distance from A to B = 985 NM.
What is the time from A to B?

8 HR 04 MIN

7 HR 48 MIN

7 HR 49 MIN

8 HR 10 MIN

594 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 513 AviaExam5897 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 236 kt.


Distance from A to B = 354 NM
What is the time from A to B?

1 HR 30 MIN

1 HR 09 MIN

1 HR 10 MIN

1 HR 40 MIN

595 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 514 AviaExam5898 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 435 kt.


Distance from A to B = 1920 NM.
What is the time from A to B?

4 HR 25 MIN

3 HR 25 MIN

3 HR 26 MIN

4 HR 10 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 184

596 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 515 AviaExam5899 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 345 kt.


Distance from A to B = 3560 NM.
What is the time from A to B?

10 HR 19 MIN

10 HR 05 MIN

11 HR 00 MIN

11 HR 02 MIN

597 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 516 AviaExam5900 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 480 kt.


Distance from A to B = 5360 NM.
What is the time from A to B?

11 HR 10 MIN

11 HR 06 MIN

11 HR 07 MIN

11 HR 15 MIN

598 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 517 AviaExam5901 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 95 kt.
Distance from A to B = 480 NM.
What is the time from A to B?

5 HR 03 MIN

4 HR 59 MIN

5 HR 00 MIN

5 HR 08 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 185

599 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 518 AviaExam5902 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 105 kt.


Distance from A to B = 103 NM.
What is the time from A to B?

00 HR 59 MIN

00 HR 57 MIN

00 HR 58 MIN

01 HR 01 MIN

600 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 519 AviaExam5903 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 120 kt.


Distance from A to B = 84 NM.
What is the time from A to B?

00 HR 42 MIN

00 HR 43 MIN

00 HR 44 MIN

00 HR 45 MIN

601 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 520 AviaExam5904 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: GS = 135 kt.


Distance from A to B = 433 NM.
What is the time from A to B?

3 HR 12 MIN

3 HR 25 MIN

3 HR 19 MIN

3 HR 20 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 186

602 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 521 AviaExam5906 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A straight line is drawn on a Lamberts conformal conic chart between two


positions of different longitude. The angular difference between the initial true
track and the final true track of the line is equal to:

chart convergency

earth convergency

conversion angle

difference in longitude

603 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 522 AviaExam5907 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

If an aircraft flies along a VOR radial it will follow a:

great circle track

rhumbline track

line of constant bearing

constant magnetic track

604 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 523 AviaExam5910 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at 6400 FT will be able to receive a VOR groundstation at 100 FT


above MSL at an approximate maximum range of:

113 NM

90 NM

98 NM

123 NM

605 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 524 AviaExam5914 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL 100 should be able to receive a VOR groundstation at 100 FT


above MSL at an approximate maximum range of:

137 NM

123 NM

130 NM

145 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 187

606 62.1.1 Ground D/F Typ: MC 525 AviaExam5916 5/7/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the minimum level that an aircraft, at a range of 113 NM, must fly in
order to contact the tower on R/T for a VDF bearing from an airport sited 169
FT above MSL?

FL60

FL50

FL80

FL100

607 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 526 AviaExam5918 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is on radial 120 with a magnetic heading of 300°, the track selector
(OBS) reads: 330. The indications on the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) are
'fly':

left with 'TO' showing

right with 'TO' showing

right with 'FROM' showing

left with 'FROM' showing

608 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 527 AviaExam5920 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following disturbances is most likely to cause the greatest
inaccuracy in ADF bearings?

Local thunderstorm activity

Coastal effect

Quadrantal error

Precipitation interference
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 188

609 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 528 AviaExam5921 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given: Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) for a VOR is selected to 090°.


From/To indicator indicates "TO".
CDI needle is deflected halfway to the right.
On what radial is the aircraft?

275

085

265

095

610 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 529 AviaExam5922 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Of what use, if any, is a military TACAN station to civil aviation ?

It can provide DME distance

It is of no use to civil aviation

It can provide a DME distance and magnetic bearing

It can provide a magnetic bearing

611 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 530 AviaExam5930 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The frequency range of a VOR receiver is:

108 to 117.95 MHz

108 to 111.95 MHz

118 to 135.95 MHz

108 to 135.95 MHz

612 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 531 AviaExam5935 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is an ILS localiser frequency?

109.15 MHz

108.25 MHz

110.20 MHz

112.10 MHz
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 189

613 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 532 AviaExam5936 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The maximum range of primary radar depends on:

pulse recurrence frequency

wave length

frequency

pulse length

614 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 533 AviaExam5940 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A frequency of airborne weather radar is:

9375 MHz

9375 GHz

9375 kHz

93.75 MHz

615 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 534 AviaExam5948 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL370 is required to commence descent at 120 NM from a VOR


and to cross the facility at FL130. If the mean GS for the descent is 288 kt, the
minimum rate of descent required is:

960 FT/MIN

860 FT/MIN

890 FT/MIN

920 FT/MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 190

616 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 535 AviaExam5949 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL310, M0.83, temperature -30°C, is required to reduce speed in


order to cross a reporting point five minutes later than planned.
Assuming that a zero wind component remains unchanged, when 360 NM
from the reporting point Mach Number should be reduced to:

M0.74

M0.76

M0.78

M0.80

617 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 536 AviaExam5950 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A ground feature was observed on a relative bearing of 325° and five minutes
later on a relative bearing of 280°. The aircraft heading was 165°(M), variation
25°W, drift 10°Right and GS 360 kt. When the relative bearing was 280°, the
distance and true bearing of the aircraft from the feature was:

30 NM and 240°

40 NM and 110°

40 NM and 290°

30 NM and 060°

618 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 537 AviaExam5951 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL350 is required to descend to cross a DME facility at FL80.


Maximum rate of descent is 1800 FT/MIN and mean GS for descent is 276 kt.
The minimum range from the DME at which descent should start is:

69 NM

79 NM

49 NM

59 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 191

619 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 538 AviaExam5954 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL120, IAS 200kt, OAT -5° and wind component +30kt, is
required to reduce speed in order to cross a reporting point 5 MIN later than
planned.
Assuming flight conditions do not change, when 100 NM from the reporting
point IAS should be reduced to:

159 kt

165 kt

169 kt

174 kt

620 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 539 AviaExam5955 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Runway direction 083°(M),
Surface W/V 035/35kt.
Calculate the effective headwind component?

24 kt

27 kt

31 kt

34 kt

621 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 540 AviaExam5957 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Approximately how many nautical miles correspond to 12 cm on a map with a


scale of 1: 2 000 000?

130

150

329

43
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 192

622 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 541 AviaExam5958 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL350 is required to cross a VOR/DME facility at


FL110 and to commence descent when 100 NM from the facility.
If the mean GS for the descent is 335 kt, the minimum rate of
descent required is:

1340 FT/MIN

1390 FT/MIN

1240 FT/MIN

1290 FT/MIN

623 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 542 AviaExam5959 5/8/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL370, M0.86, OAT -44°C, headwind component 110 kt, is


required to reduce speed in order to cross a reporting point 5 MIN later than
planned.
If the speed reduction were to be made 420 NM from the reporting point, what
Mach Number is required?

M0.81

M0.73

M0.75

M0.79

624 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 543 AviaExam5960 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
For take-off an aircraft requires a headwind component
of at least 10 kt and has a cross-wind limitation of 35 kt.
The angle between the wind direction and the runway is 60°,
Calculate the minimum and maximum allowable wind speeds?

20 kt and 40 kt

12 kt and 38 kt

15 kt and 43 kt

18 kt and 50 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 193

625 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 544 AviaExam5963 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL390 is required to descend to cross a DME facility at FL70.


Maximum rate of descent is 2500 FT/MIN, mean GS during descent is 248 kt.
What is the minimum range from the DME at which descent should
commence?

53 NM

58 NM

63 NM

68 NM

626 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 545 AviaExam5964 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Runway direction 230°(T),
Surface W/V 280°(T)/40 kt.
Calculate the effective cross-wind component?

31 kt

36 kt

21 kt

26 kt

627 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 546 AviaExam5965 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL370 is required to commence descent when


100 NM from a DME facility and to cross the station at FL120.
If the mean GS during the descent is 396 kt, the minimum
rate of descent required is approximately:

1650 FT/MIN

2400 FT/MIN

1000 FT/MIN

1550 FT/MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 194

628 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 547 AviaExam5966 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL140, IAS 210 kt, OAT -5°C and wind component minus 35 kt, is
required to reduce speed in order to cross a reporting point 5 MIN later than
planned.
Assuming that flight conditions do not change, when 150 NM from the
reporting point the IAS should be reduced by:[

20 kt

25 kt

30 kt

15 kt

629 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 548 AviaExam5967 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A Lambert conformal conic chart has a constant of the cone of 0.75.


The initial course of a straight line track drawn on this chart from A (40°N
050°W) to B is 043°(T) at A; course at B is 055°(T).
What is the longitude of B?

34°W

36°W

38°W

41°W

630 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 549 AviaExam5968 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Runway direction 210°(M),
Surface W/V 230°(M)/30kt.
Calculate the cross-wind component?

10 kt

19 kt

16 kt

13 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 195

631 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 550 AviaExam5971 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

At 0422 an aircraft at FL370, GS 320kt,


is on the direct track to VOR 'X' 185 NM distant.
The aircraft is required to cross VOR 'X' at FL80.
For a mean rate of descent of 1800 FT/MIN at a mean GS of 232 kt,
the latest time at which to commence descent is:

0445

0448

0451

0454

632 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 551 AviaExam5972 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL330 is required to commence descent


when 65 NM from a VOR and to cross the VOR at FL100.
The mean GS during the descent is 330 kt.
What is the minimum rate of descent required?

1950 FT/MIN

1650 FT/MIN

1750 FT/MIN

1850 FT/MIN

633 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 552 AviaExam5973 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft obtains a relative bearing of 315° from an NDB at 0830. At 0840 the
relative bearing from the same NDB is 270°.
Assuming no drift and a GS of 240 kt, what is the approximate range from the
NDB at 0840?

40 NM

50 NM

60 NM

30 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 196

634 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 553 AviaExam5974 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The equivalent of 70 m/sec is approximately:

136 kt

145 kt

210 kt

35 kt

635 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 554 AviaExam5977 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL290 is required to commence descent


when 50 NM from a VOR and to cross that VOR at FL80.
Mean GS during descent is 271kt.
What is the minimum rate of descent required?

1900 FT/MIN

2000 FT/MIN

1700 FT/MIN

1800 FT/MIN

636 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 555 AviaExam5979 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A Lambert conformal conic chart has a constant of the cone of 0.80.


A straight line course drawn on this chart from A (53°N 004°W) to B is 080° at
A; course at B is 092°(T).
What is the longitude of B?

011°E

009°36'E

008°E

019°E
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 197

637 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 556 AviaExam5980 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Runway direction 305°(M),
Surface W/V 260°(M)/30 kt.
Calculate the cross-wind component?

21 kt

24 kt

27 kt

18 kt

638 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 557 AviaExam5981 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL350 is required to commence descent


when 85 NM from a VOR and to cross the VOR at FL80.
The mean GS for the descent is 340 kt.
What is the minimum rate of descent required?

1800 FT/MIN

1900 FT/MIN

1600 FT/MIN

1700 FT/MIN

639 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 558 AviaExam5982 5/9/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An island is observed by weather radar to be 15° to the left.


The aircraft heading is 120°(M) and the magnetic variation 17°W.
What is the true bearing of the aircraft from the island?

268°

302°

088°

122°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 198

640 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 559 AviaExam5984 5/10/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The distance between positions A and B is 180 NM. An aircraft departs


position A and after having travelled 60 NM, its position is pinpointed 4 NM
left of the intended track. Assuming no change in wind velocity, what
alteration of heading must be made in order to arrive at position B?

6° Right

8° Right

2° Left

4° Right

641 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 560 AviaExam5991 5/10/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Complete the following statement regarding magnetic variation.


The charted values of magnetic variation on earth normally change annually
due to:

magnetic pole movement causing numerical values at all locations to


increase or decrease

magnetic pole movement causing numerical values at all locations to


increase.

a reducing field strength causing numerical values at all locations to


decrease.

an increasing field strength causing numerical values at all locations to


increase.

642 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 561 AviaExam5993 5/10/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements is correct concerning the effect of turning


errors on a direct reading compass?

Turning errors are greatest on north/south headings, and are greatest at


high latitudes

Turning errors are greatest on east/west headings, and are least at high
latitudes

Turning errors are greatest on north/south headings, and are least at


high latitudes

Turning errors are greatest on east/west headings, and are greatest at


high latitudes
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 199

643 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 562 AviaExam5995 5/10/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is an occasion for carrying out a compass swing on a


Direct Reading Compass?

After an aircraft has passed through a severe electrical storm, or has


been struck by lightning

Before an aircraft goes on any flight that involves a large change of


magnetic latitude

After any of the aircraft radio equipment has been changed due to
unserviceability

Whenever an aircraft carries a large freight load regardless of its content

644 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 563 AviaExam5996 5/10/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

In a Satellite-Assisted Navigation System (GNSS/GPS), a fix is obtained by:

measuring the time taken for a minimum number of satellites'


transmissions, in known positions, to reach the aircraft's receiver

the aircraft's receiver measuring the phase angle of signals received


from a number of satellites in known positions

measuring the time taken for an aircraft's transmissions to travel to a


number of satellites, in known positions, and return to the aircraft's
receiver

measuring the pulse lengths of signals received from a minimum


number of satellites received in a specific sequential order

645 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 564 AviaExam6196 5/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Question to be deleted: Which of the following statements concerning earth


magnetism is completely correct?

An isogonal is a line which connects places with the same magnetic


variation; the aclinic is the line of zero magnetic dip

An isogonal is a line which connects places with the same magnetic


variation; the agonic line is the line of zero magnetic dip

An isogonal is a line which connects places of equal dip; the aclinic is


the line of zero magnetic dip

An isogonal is a line which connects places with the same magnetic


variation; the aclinic connects places with the same magnetic field
strength
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 200

646 62.6.3 Loran-C Typ: MC 565 AviaExam6200 5/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following frequency-bands is used by the Loran C navigation


system?

90 - 110 kHz

1750 - 1950 kHz

10.2 - 13.6 kHz

978 - 1213 MHz

647 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 566 AviaExam6205 5/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

GPS satellites transmit on two L-band frequencies with different types of


signals.
Which of these are generally available for use by civil aviation?

L1-coarse acquisition (C/A) with selected availability (S/A)

L2-coarse acquisition (C/A)

L1-precise (P)

L2-for communications purpose

648 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 567 AviaExam6206 5/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following coordinate systems is used by the NAVSTAR/GPS


receiver to calculate position (latitude, longitude and altitude)?

WGS 84

ED 87

ED 50

PZ 90
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 201

649 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 568 AviaExam6207 5/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following lists all the parameters that can be determined by a
GPS receiver tracking signals from 4 different satellites?

Latitude, longitude, altitude and time

Latitude and longitude

Latitude, longitude and time

Latitude, longitude and altitude

650 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 569 AviaExam6217 6/25/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

What approximate rate of descent is required in order to maintain a 3°


glidepath at a groundspeed of 90 kt?

450 FT/MIN

400 FT/MIN

600 FT/MIN

700 FT/MIN

651 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 570 AviaExam9178 8/31/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Direct Mercator chart at latitude 15°S, a certain length represents a


distance of 120 NM on the earth.
The same length on the chart will represent on the earth, at latitude 10°N, a
distance of:

122.3 NM

117.7 NM

124.2 NM

118.2 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 202

652 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 571 AviaExam9179 8/31/1995 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Direct Mercator chart at latitude of 45°N, a certain length represents a


distance of 90 NM on the earth.
The same length on the chart will represent on the earth, at latitude 30°N, a
distance of:

110 NM

73.5 NM

78 NM

45 NM

653 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 572 AviaExam9282 1/8/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

In an Inertial Navigation System (INS), Ground Speed (GS) is calculated:

by integrating measured acceleration

from TAS and W/V from Air Data Computer (ADC)

from TAS and W/V from RNAV data

by integrating gyro precession in N/S and E/W directions respectively

654 61.1.1 The solar system Typ: MC 573 AviaExam9391 11/25/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

In which two months of the year is the difference between the transit of the
Apparent Sun and Mean Sun across the Greenwich Meridian the greatest?

February and November

March and September

June and December

April and August


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 203

655 61.1.1 The solar system Typ: MC 574 AviaExam9392 11/25/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the highest latitude listed below at which the sun will reach an
altitude of 90° above the horizon at some time during the year?

23°

45°

66°

656 61.1.1 The solar system Typ: MC 575 AviaExam9393 11/25/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Assuming mid-latitudes (40° to 50°N/S).


At which time of year is the relationship between the length
of day and night, as well as the rate of change of declination
of the sun, changing at the greatest rate?

Spring equinox and autumn equinox

Summer solstice and spring equinox

summer solstice and winter solstice

Winter solstice and autumn equinox

657 61.1.1 The solar system Typ: MC 576 AviaExam9394 11/25/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

At what approximate date is the earth closest to the sun (perihelion)?

Beginning of January

End of March

Beginning of July

End of June

658 61.1.1 The solar system Typ: MC 577 AviaExam9395 11/25/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

At what approximate date is the earth furthest from the sun (aphelion)?

Beginning of July

End of December

Beginning of January

End of September
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 204

659 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 578 AviaExam9396 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A flight is to be made from 'A' 49°S 180°E/W to 'B' 58°S, 180°E/W.


The distance in kilometres from 'A' to 'B' is approximately:

1000

1222

540

804

660 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 579 AviaExam9397 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at position 60°N 005°W tracks 090°(T) for 315 km.


On completion of the flight the longitude will be:

000°40'E

005°15'E

002°10'W

000°15'E

661 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 580 AviaExam9398 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The 'departure' between positions 60°N 160°E and 60°N 'x' is 900 NM.
What is the longitude of 'x'?

170°W

140°W

145°E

175°E

662 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 581 AviaExam9399 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at latitude 02°20'N tracks 180°(T) for 685 km.


On completion of the flight the latitude will be:

03°50'S

04°10'S

04°30'S

09°05'S
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 205

663 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 582 AviaExam9400 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at latitude 10° South flies north at a GS of 890 km/Hr.


What will its latitude be after 1.5 HR?

02°00'N

12°15'N

22°00'N

03°50'N

664 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 583 AviaExam9401 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at latitude 10°North flies south at a groundspeed of 445 km/Hr.


What will be its latitude after 3 HR?

02°00'S

12°15'S

22°00'S

03°50'S

665 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 584 AviaExam9402 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

The main reason for mounting the detector unit of a remote reading compass
in the wingtip of an aeroplane is:

to minimise the amount of deviation caused by aircraft magnetism and


electrical circuits

to maximise the units exposure to the earth's magnetic field

to ensure that the unit is in the most accessible position on the aircraft
for ease of maintenance

by having detector units on both wingtips, to cancel out the deviation


effects caused by the aircraft structure
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 206

666 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 585 AviaExam9403 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

On a transverse Mercator chart, the scale is exactly correct along the:

meridians of tangency

equator and parallel of origin

meridian of tangency and the parallel of latitude perpendicular to it

prime meridian and the equator

667 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 586 AviaExam9404 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

On a transverse Mercator chart, with the exception of the Equator, parallels of


latitude appear as:

ellipses

straight lines

hyperbolic lines

parabolas

668 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 587 AviaExam9406 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An Oblique Mercator projection is used specifically to produce:

charts of the great circle route between two points

radio navigational charts in equatorial regions

topographical maps of large east/ west extent

plotting charts in equatorial regions

669 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 588 AviaExam9407 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Transverse Mercator projections are used for:

maps of large north/south extent

maps of large east/west extent in equatorial areas

radio navigation charts in equatorial areas

plotting charts in equatorial areas


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 207

670 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 589 AviaExam9408 11/27/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance A to B = 120 NM,
After 30 NM aircraft is 3 NM to the left of course.
What heading alteration should be made in order to arrive at point 'B'?

8° right

6° right

4° right

8° left

671 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 590 AviaExam9409 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft was over 'A' at 1435 hours flying direct to 'B'.


Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 2900 NM
True airspeed 470 kt
Mean wind component 'out' +55 kt
Mean wind component 'back' -75 kt
The ETA for reaching the Point of Equal Time (PET) between 'A' and 'B' is:

1657

1744

1846

1721
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 208

672 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 591 AviaExam9410 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft was over 'A' at 1435 hours flying direct to 'B'.


Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 2900 NM
True airspeed 470 kt
Mean wind component 'out' +55 kt
Mean wind component 'back' -75 kt
Safe endurance 9 HR 30 MIN
The distance from 'A' to the Point of Safe Return (PSR) 'A' is:

2141 NM

1611 NM

1759 NM

2844 NM

673 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 592 AviaExam9411 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 2484 NM
Groundspeed 'out' 420 kt
Groundspeed 'back' 500 kt
The time from 'A' to the Point of Equal Time (PET) between 'A' and 'B' is:

193 MIN

163 MIN

173 MIN

183 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 209

674 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 593 AviaExam9412 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 2484 NM
Mean groundspeed 'out' 420 kt
Mean groundspeed 'back' 500 kt
Safe endurance 08 HR 30 MIN
The distance from 'A' to the Point of Safe Return (PSR) 'A' is:

1940 NM

1908 NM

1736 NM

1630 NM

675 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 594 AviaExam9413 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft was over 'Q' at 1320 hours flying direct to 'R'.


Given:
Distance 'Q' to 'R' 3016 NM
True airspeed 480 kt
Mean wind component 'out' -90 kt
Mean wind component 'back' +75 kt
The ETA for reaching the Point of Equal Time (PET) between 'Q' and 'R' is:

1752

1756

1820

1742
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 210

676 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 595 AviaExam9414 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft was over 'Q' at 1320 hours flying direct to 'R'.


Given:
Distance 'Q' to 'R' 3016 NM
True airspeed 480 kt
Mean wind component 'out' -90 kt
Mean wind component 'back' +75 kt
Safe endurance 10:00 HR
The distance from 'Q' to the Point of Safe Return (PSR) 'Q' is:

2290 NM

2370 NM

1310 NM

1510 NM

677 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 596 AviaExam9415 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 1973 NM
Groundspeed 'out' 430 kt
Groundspeed 'back' 385 kt
The time from 'A' to the Point of Equal Time (PET) between 'A' and 'B' is:

130 MIN

145 MIN

162 MIN

181 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 211

678 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 597 AviaExam9416 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 1973 NM
Groundspeed 'out' 430 kt
Groundspeed 'back' 385 kt
Safe endurance 7 HR 20 MIN
The distance from 'A' to the Point of Safe Return (PSR) 'A' is:

1490 NM

1664 NM

1698 NM

1422 NM

679 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 598 AviaExam9417 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 2346 NM
Groundspeed 'out' 365 kt
Groundspeed 'back' 480 kt
The time from 'A' to the Point of Equal Time (PET) between 'A' and 'B' is:

219 MIN

290 MIN

197 MIN

167 MIN

680 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 599 AviaExam9418 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 2346 NM
Groundspeed 'out' 365 kt
Groundspeed 'back' 480 kt
Safe endurance 8 HR 30 MIN
The time from 'A' to the Point of Safe Return (PSR) 'A' is:

290 MIN

219 MIN

197 MIN

209 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 212

681 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 600 AviaExam9419 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'Q' to 'R' 1760 NM
Groundspeed 'out' 435 kt
Groundspeed 'back' 385 kt
The time from 'Q' to the Point of Equal Time (PET) between 'Q' and 'R' is:

114 MIN

110 MIN

106 MIN

102 MIN

682 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 601 AviaExam9420 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'Q' to 'R' 1760 NM
Groundspeed 'out' 435 kt
Groundspeed 'back' 385 kt
Safe endurance 9 HR
The distance from 'Q' to the Point of Safe Return (PSR) between 'Q' and 'R' is:

1838 NM

1313 NM

1467 NM

1642 NM

683 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 602 AviaExam9421 11/29/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' 3623 NM
Groundspeed 'out' 370 kt
Groundspeed 'back' 300 kt
The time from 'A' to the Point of Equal Time (PET) between 'A' and 'B' is:

263 MIN

288 MIN

323 MIN

238 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 213

684 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 603 AviaExam9424 12/3/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

A ground feature was observed on a relative bearing of 315° and 3 MIN later
on a relative bearing of 270°.
The W/V is calm; aircraft GS 180 kt.
What is the minimum distance between the aircraft and the ground feature?

9 NM

12 NM

3 NM

6 NM

685 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 604 AviaExam9425 12/3/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An island is observed to be 30° to the right of the nose of the aircraft.


The aircraft heading is 290°(M), variation 10°(E).
The bearing °(T) from the aircraft to the island is:

330

270

250

310

686 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 605 AviaExam9426 12/3/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An island is observed to be 15° to the left.


The aircraft heading is 120°(M), variation 17°(W).
The bearing °(T) from the aircraft to the island is:

088

122

268

302
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 214

687 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 606 AviaExam9428 12/10/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is planned to fly from position 'A' to position 'B',


distance 480 NM at an average GS of 240 kt. It departs 'A' at 1000 UTC.
After flying 150 NM along track from 'A', the aircraft is 2 MIN behind planned
time.
Using the actual GS experienced, what is the revised ETA at 'B'?

1206

1203

1153

1157

688 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 607 AviaExam9429 12/10/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is planned to fly from position 'A' to position 'B', distance 320 NM,
at an average GS of 180 kt. It departs 'A' at 1200 UTC. After flying 70 NM along
track from 'A', the aircraft is 3 MIN ahead of planned time.
Using the actual GS experienced, what is the revised ETA at 'B'?

1333 UTC

1401 UTC

1347 UTC

1340 UTC

689 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 608 AviaExam9430 12/10/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is planned to fly from position 'A' to position 'B',


distance 250 NM at an average GS of 115 kt. It departs 'A' at 0900 UTC.
After flying 75 NM along track from 'A', the aircraft is 1.5 MIN behind planned
time.
Using the actual GS experienced, what is the revised ETA at 'B'?

1115 UTC

1110 UTC

1044 UTC

1050 UTC
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 215

690 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 609 AviaExam9431 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Magnetic track = 075°,
HDG = 066°(M),
VAR = 11°E,
TAS = 275 kt
Aircraft flies 48 NM in 10 MIN.
Calculate the true W/V °?

340°/45 kt

320°/50 kt

210°/15 kt

180°/45 kt

691 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 610 AviaExam9432 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Magnetic track = 210°,
Magnetic HDG = 215°,
VAR = 15°E,
TAS = 360 kt,
Aircraft flies 64 NM in 12 MIN.
Calculate the true W/V?

265°/50 kt

195°/50 kt

235°/50 kt

300°/30 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 216

692 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 611 AviaExam9433 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' is 475 NM,
Planned GS 315 kt,
ATD 1000 UTC,
1040 UTC - fix obtained 190 NM along track.
What GS must be maintained from the fix in
order to achieve planned ETA at 'B'?

340 kt

360 kt.

300 kt

320 kt.

693 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 612 AviaExam9434 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' is 325 NM,
Planned GS 315 kt,
ATD 1130 UTC,
1205 UTC - fix obtained 165 NM along track.
What GS must be maintained from the fix in
order to achieve planned ETA at 'B'?

355 kt

375 kt

395 kt

335 kt

694 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 613 AviaExam9435 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' is 100 NM,
Fix obtained 40 NM along and 6 NM to the left of course.
What heading alteration must be made to reach 'B'?

15° Right

9° Right

6° Right

18° Right
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 217

695 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 614 AviaExam9436 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance 'A' to 'B' is 90 NM,
Fix obtained 60 NM along and 4 NM to the right of course.
What heading alteration must be made to reach 'B'?

12° Left

16° Left

4° Left

8° Left

696 61.5.4 Flight log (including navigation records) Typ: MC 615 AviaExam9437 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

060-005.jpg
Complete line 1 of the 'FLIGHT NAVIGATION LOG'; positions 'A' to 'B'.
What is the HDG°(M) and ETA?

268° - 1114 UTC

282° - 1128 UTC

282° - 1114 UTC

268° - 1128 UTC

697 61.5.4 Flight log (including navigation records) Typ: MC 616 AviaExam9438 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

060-005.jpg
Complete line 2 of the 'FLIGHT NAVIGATION LOG', positions 'C' to 'D'.
What is the HDG°(M) and ETA?

HDG 193° - ETA 1239 UTC

HDG 188° - ETA 1229 UTC

HDG 193° - ETA 1249 UTC

HDG 183° - ETA 1159 UTC


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 218

698 61.5.4 Flight log (including navigation records) Typ: MC 617 AviaExam9439 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

060-006.jpg
Complete line 3 of the 'FLIGHT NAVIGATION LOG', positions 'E' to 'F'.
What is the HDG°(M) and ETA?

HDG 105° - ETA 1205 UTC

HDG 095° - ETA 1155 UTC

HDG 106° - ETA 1215 UTC

HDG 115° - ETA 1145 UTC

699 61.5.4 Flight log (including navigation records) Typ: MC 618 AviaExam9440 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

060-006.jpg
Complete line 4 of the 'FLIGHT NAVIGATION LOG', positions 'G' to 'H'.
What is the HDG°(M) and ETA?

HDG 344° - ETA 1336 UTC

HDG 354° - ETA 1326 UTC

HDG 034° - ETA 1336 UTC

HDG 344° - ETA 1303 UTC

700 61.5.4 Flight log (including navigation records) Typ: MC 619 AviaExam9441 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

060-006.jpg
Complete line 5 of the 'FLIGHT NAVIGATION LOG', positions 'J' to 'K'.
What is the HDG°(M) and ETA?

HDG 337° - ETA 1422 UTC

HDG 320° - ETA 1412 UTC

HDG 337° - ETA 1322 UTC

HDG 320° - ETA 1432 UTC


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 219

701 61.5.4 Flight log (including navigation records) Typ: MC 620 AviaExam9442 12/11/1996 Pkt.: 1.00

060-006.jpg
Complete line 6 of the 'FLIGHT NAVIGATION LOG', positions 'L' to 'M'.
What is the HDG°(M) and ETA?

HDG 075° - ETA 1502 UTC

HDG 064° - ETA 1449 UTC

HDG 075° - ETA 1452 UTC

HDG 070° - ETA 1459 UTC

702 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 621 AviaExam9446 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The resultant of the first integration of the output from the east/west
accelerometer of an inertial navigation system (INS) in NAV MODE is:

velocity along the local parallel of latitude

change of longitude

vehicle longitude

departure

703 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 622 AviaExam9447 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following lists, which compares an Inertial Reference System


that utilises Ring Laser Gyroscopes (RLG) instead of conventional
gyroscopes, is completely correct?

There is little or no 'spin up' time and it is insensitive to gravitational ('g')


forces

The platform is kept stable relative to the earth mathematically rather


than mechanically but it has a longer 'spin up' time

It does not suffer from 'lock in' error and it is insensitive to gravitational
('g') forces

There is little or no 'spin up' time and it does not suffer from 'lock in'
error
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 220

704 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 623 AviaExam9448 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The principle of 'Schuler Tuning' as applied to the operation of Inertial


Navigation Systems/ Inertial Reference Systems is applicable to:

both gyro-stabilised platform and 'strapdown' systems

only gyro-stabilised systems

both gyro-stabilised and laser gyro systems but only when operating in
the non 'strapdown' mode

only to 'strapdown' laser gyro systems

705 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 624 AviaExam9449 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The resultant of the first integration from the north/south accelerometer of an


inertial navigation system (INS) in the NAV MODE is:

velocity along the local meridian

groundspeed

change latitude

latitude

706 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 625 AviaExam9450 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Double integration of the output from the east/west accelerometer of an


inertial navigation system (INS) in the NAV MODE give:

distance east/west

vehicle longitude

distance north/south

velocity east/west
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 221

707 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 626 AviaExam9451 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

During the initial alignment of an inertial navigation system (INS) the


equipment:

will not accept a 10° error in initial latitude but will accept a 10° error in
initial longitude

will accept a 10° error in initial latitude but will not accept a 10° error in
initial longitude

will not accept a 10° error in initial latitude or initial longitude

will accept a 10° error in initial latitude and initial longitude

708 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 627 AviaExam9452 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statement is correct concerning gyro-compassing of


an inertial navigation system (INS)?

Gyro-compassing of an INS is not possible in flight because it cannot


differentiate between movement induced and misalignment induced
accelerations.

Gyro-compassing of an INS is possible in flight because it can


differentiate between movement induced and misalignment induced
accelerations.

Gyro-compassing of an INS is possible in flight because it cannot


differentiate between movement induced and misalignment induced
accelerations.

Gyro-compassing of an INS is not possible in flight because it can


differentiate between movement induced and misalignment induced
accelerations.

709 61.6.4 Flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 628 AviaExam9456 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

With reference to an inertial navigation system (INS), the initial great circle
track between computer inserted waypoints will be displayed when the
control display unit (CDU) is selected to:

DSRTK/STS

HDG/DA

TK/GS

XTK/TKE
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 222

710 61.6.4 Flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 629 AviaExam9457 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Gyrocompassing of an inertial reference system (IRS) is accomplished with


the mode selector switched to:

ALIGN

STBY

ATT/REF

ON

711 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 630 AviaExam9458 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The following points are entered into an inertial navigation system (INS).
WPT 1: 60°N 30°W
WPT 2: 60°N 20°W
WPT 3: 60°N 10°W
The inertial navigation system is connected to the automatic pilot on route
(1-2-3).
The track change when passing WPT 2 will be approximately:

a 9° decrease

zero

a 9° increase

a 4° decrease

712 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 631 AviaExam9459 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The automatic flight control system (AFCS) in an aircraft is coupled to the


guidance outputs from an inertial navigation system (INS) and the aircraft is
flying from waypoint No. 2 (60°00'S 070°00'W) to No. 3 (60°00'S 080°00'W).
Comparing the initial track (°T) at 070°00'W and the final track (°T) at
080°00'W, the difference between them is that the initial track is
approximately:

9° less than the final one

5° greater than the final one

9° greater than the final one

5° less than the final one


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 223

713 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 632 AviaExam9460 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The automatic flight control system is coupled to the guidance outputs from
an inertial navigation system.
Which pair of latitudes will give the greatest difference between initial track
read-out and the average true course given, in each case, a difference of
longitude of 10°?

60°N to 60°N

60°N to 50°N

30°S to 30°N

30°S to 25°S

714 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 633 AviaExam9461 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The automatic flight control system (AFCS) in an aircraft is coupled to the


guidance outputs of an inertial navigation system (INS).
The aircraft is flying between waypoints No. 4 (45°00'N 040°00'W) and No.5
(45°00'N 030°00'W).
If a constant drift angle were experienced between the two waypoints, on
arrival over waypoint No. 5 the track has:

increased by less than 10°

remained unchanged

decreased by less than 10°

decreased by more than 10°

715 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 634 AviaExam9462 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The automatic flight control system (AFCS) in an aircraft is coupled to the


guidance outputs from an inertial navigation system (INS).
The aircraft is flying between inserted waypoints No. 3 (55°00'N 020°00'W) and
No.4 (55°00'N 030°00'W).
With DSRTK/STS selected on the CDU, to the nearest whole degree, the initial
track read-out from waypoint No. 3 will be:

274°

278°

266°

270°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 224

716 61.6.4 Flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 635 AviaExam9463 1/3/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following lists the order of available selections on the Mode
Selector switches of a 737-400 Inertial Reference System?

OFF - ALIGN - NAV - ATT

OFF - ON - ALIGN - NAV

OFF - STBY - ALIGN - NAV

OFF - ALIGN - ATT - NAV

717 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 636 AviaExam9466 2/20/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the effect on the Mach number and TAS in an aircraft that is climbing
with constant CAS?

Mach number increases; TAS increases

Mach number remains constant; TAS increases

Mach number decreases; TAS decreases

Mach number increases; TAS remains constant

718 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 637 AviaExam9467 2/20/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
TAS = 197 kt,
True course = 240°,
W/V = 180/30kt.
Descent is initiated at FL 220 and completed at FL 40.
Distance to be covered during descent is 39 NM.
What is the approximate rate of descent?

1400 FT/MIN

800 FT/MIN

950 FT/MIN

1500 FT/MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 225

719 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 638 AviaExam9468 2/20/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
ILS GP angle = 3.5 DEG,
GS = 150 kt.
What is the approximate rate of descent?

900 FT/MIN

1000 FT/MIN

700 FT/MIN

800 FT/MIN

720 61.5.2 Navigation in climb and descent Typ: MC 639 AviaExam9469 2/20/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
aircraft height 2500 FT,
ILS GP angle 3°.
At what approximate distance from THR can you expect to capture the GP?

8.3 NM

7.0 NM

13.1 NM

14.5 NM

721 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 640 AviaExam9880 4/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

ICAO Annex 11 defines Area Navigation (RNAV) as a method of navigation


which permits aircraft operation on any desired flight path:

within the coverage of station-referenced navigation aids or within the


limits of the capability of self-contained aids, or a combination of these

outside the coverage of station-referenced navigation aids provided that


it is equipped with a minimum of one serviceable self-contained
navigation aid

within the coverage of station-referenced navigation aids provided that it


is equipped with a minimum of one serviceable self-contained
navigation aid

outside the coverage of station-referenced navigation aids provided that


it is equipped with a minimum of two serviceable self-contained
navigation aids
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 226

722 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 641 AviaExam9883 4/10/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Basic RNAV requires a track-keeping accuracy of:

+/- 5NM or better for 95% of the flight time

+/- 3NM or better for 90% of the flight time

+/- 2NM or better for 75% of the flight time

+/- 5NM or better throughout the flight

723 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 642 AviaExam9885 6/4/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the source of magnetic variation information in a Flight Management


System (FMS)?

Magnetic variation information is stored in each IRS memory; it is


applied to the true heading calculated by the respective IRS

The main directional gyro which is coupled to the magnetic sensor (flux
valve) positioned in the wingtip

The FMS calculates MH and MT from the FMC position

Magnetic variation is calculated by each IRS based on the respective IRS


position and the aircraft magnetic heading

724 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 643 AviaExam9886 6/4/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The Flight Management Computer (FMC) position is:

the computed position based on a number of sources (IRS, Radio, ILS,


GPS etc)

the actual position of the aircraft at any point in time

the same as that given on the No. 1 IRS

another source of aircraft position; it is independent of other navigation


sources (IRS, Radio, ILS, etc)
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 227

725 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 644 AviaExam9887 6/4/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Where and when are the IRS positions updated?

Only on the ground during the alignment procedure

During flight IRS positions are automatically updated by the FMC

IRS positions are updated by pressing the 'Take-off/ Go-around' button


at the start of the take-off roll

Updating is normally carried out by the crew when over-flying a known


position (VOR station or NDB)

726 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 645 AviaExam9891 6/6/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Under JAR-25 colour code rules, features displayed in red on an Electronic


Flight Instrument System (EFIS), indicate:

warnings; flight envelope and system limits

flight envelope and system limits; engaged modes

warnings; cautions and abnormal sources

cautions and abnormal sources; engaged modes

727 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 646 AviaExam9892 6/6/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Under JAR-25 colour code rules, features displayed in amber/yellow on an


Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS), indicate:

cautions, abnormal sources

flight envelope and system limits

warnings

engaged modes
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 228

728 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 647 AviaExam9893 6/6/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Under JAR-25 general colour code rules, features displayed in green on an


Electronic Flight Information System should indicate:

engaged modes

cautions, abnormal sources

the earth

the ILS deviation pointer

729 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 648 AviaExam9894 6/6/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Under JAR-25 colour code rules features displayed in cyan/blue, on an


Electronic Flight Instrument Systems (EFIS), indicate:

the sky

engaged modes

the flight director bar(s)

flight envelope and system limits

730 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 649 AviaExam9902 6/6/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Under JAR-25 colour code rules for Electronic Flight Instrument Systems
(EFIS), increasing intensity of precipitation are coloured in the order:

green, amber/yellow, red, magenta

green, red, magenta, black

black, amber/yellow, magenta, red

amber/yellow, magenta, black


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 229

731 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 650 AviaExam9905 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-007.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in MAP mode?

Figure 3

Figure 4

Figure 1

Figure 2

732 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 651 AviaExam9906 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-007.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in PLAN mode?

Figure 2

Figure 3

Figure 4

Figure 1

733 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 652 AviaExam9907 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-007.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in Expanded (EXP) VOR/ILS mode with an ILS frequency selected?

Figure 1

Figure 2

Figure 3

Figure 4
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 230

734 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 653 AviaExam9908 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-007.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in Expanded (EXP) VOR/ILS mode with a VOR frequency selected?

Figure 4

Figure 1

Figure 2

Figure 3

735 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 654 AviaExam9909 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-008.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in FULL VOR/ILS mode with an VOR frequency selected?

Figure 1

Figure 4

Figure 5

Figure 6

736 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 655 AviaExam9910 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-008.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in PLAN mode?

Figure 2

Figure 3

Figure 4

Figure 6
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 231

737 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 656 AviaExam9911 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-008.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in MAP mode?

Figure 3

Figure 4

Figure 5

Figure 2

738 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 657 AviaExam9912 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-008.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in Expanded (EXP) VOR/ILS mode with an VOR frequency selected?

Figure 4

Figure 5

Figure 6

Figure 1

739 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 658 AviaExam9913 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-008.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in Expanded (EXP) VOR/ILS mode with an ILS frequency selected?

Figure 5

Figure 6

Figure 2

Figure 3
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 232

740 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 659 AviaExam9914 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-008.jpg
Which of the figures depicts an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
display in FULL VOR/ILS mode with an ILS frequency selected?

Figure 6

Figure 2

Figure 3

Figure 5

741 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 660 AviaExam9915 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-009.jpg
What drift is being experienced?

8° Left

20° Right

20° Left

12° Right

742 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 661 AviaExam9916 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-010.jpg
What is the value of the track from TBX to YTB?

097°(T)

170°(M)

140°(M)

280°(T)
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 233

743 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 662 AviaExam9917 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-011.jpg
What wind velocity is indicated?

105°(M)/20KT

030°(M)/20KT

255°(M)/20KT

285°(M)/20KT

744 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 663 AviaExam9918 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-012.jpg
What is the value of the selected course?

299°(M)

272°(M)

260°(M)

280°(M)

745 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 664 AviaExam9919 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-013.jpg
What is the aircraft track?

272°(M)

300°(M)

260°(M)

280°(M)

746 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 665 AviaExam9920 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-014.jpg
The letters QTX and adjacent symbol indicate a:

VOR/DME/VORTAC

TACAN

VOR

Airport
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 234

747 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 666 AviaExam9921 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-015.jpg
The 'O' followed by the letters 'KABC' indicate:

an off-route airport

a designated alternate airport

an off-route VOR/DME

the destination airport

748 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 667 AviaExam9922 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-013.jpg
What is the heading bug selected to?

260°(M)

272°(M)

280°(M)

300°(M)

749 62.5.3 Instrument indications Typ: MC 668 AviaExam9923 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

060-016.jpg
The diagram indicates that the aircraft is to the:

right of the localizer and below the glidepath

right of the localizer and above the glidepath

left of the localizer and below the glidepath

left of the localizer and above the glidepath

750 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 669 AviaExam9924 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

In which screen modes of an Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI)


on a B737-400 will radar returns not be shown?

FULL NAV, FULL VOR/ILS and PLAN

EXP VOR/ ILS, PLAN and MAP

FULL NAV, PLAN and MAP

FULL VOR/ILS, EXP VOR/ILS and PLAN


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 235

751 61.6.4 Flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 670 AviaExam9928 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

ATT Mode of the Inertial Reference System (IRS) is a back-up mode providing:

only attitude and heading information

only attitude information

navigation information

altitude, heading and position information

752 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 671 AviaExam9929 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements concerning the position indicated on the


Inertial Reference System (IRS) display is correct?

It is not updated once the IRS mode is set to NAV

It is constantly updated from information obtained by the FMC

It is updated when 'go-around' is selected on take-off

The positions from the two IRSs are compared to obtain a 'best position'
which is displayed on the IRS

753 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 672 AviaExam9933 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements concerning the loss of alignment by an


Inertial Reference System (IRS) in flight is correct?

The navigation mode, including present position and ground speed


outputs, is inoperative for the remainder of the flight

The IRS has to be coupled to the remaining serviceable system and a


realignment carried out in flight

The mode selector has to be rotated to ATT then back through ALIGN to
NAV in order to obtain an in-flight realignment

It is not usable in any mode and must be shut down for the rest of the
flight
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 236

754 62.1.1 Ground D/F Typ: MC 673 AviaExam9940 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

What airborne equipment, if any, is required to be fitted in order that a VDF


let-down may be flown?

VHF radio

VOR

none

VOR/DME

755 62.1.1 Ground D/F Typ: MC 674 AviaExam9941 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is an advantage of Ground/DF (VDF) let-down?

It only requires a VHF radio to be fitted to the aircraft

It is pilot interpreted and does not require the assistance of ATC

It does not require any special equipment to be fitted to the aircraft

It does not require any special equipment, apart from a VHF radio, to be
installed in the aircraft or on the ground

756 62.1.6 MLS Typ: MC 675 AviaExam9944 6/9/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

In which frequency band does the Microwave Landing System (MLS) operate?

SHF

EHF

VHF

UHF
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 237

757 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 676 AviaExam9948 6/10/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

An island appears 60° to the left of the centre line on an airborne weather
radar display. What is the true bearing of the aircraft from the island if at the
time of observation the aircraft was on a magnetic heading (MH) of 276° with
the magnetic variation (VAR) 10°E?

046°

086°

226°

026°

758 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 677 AviaExam9949 6/10/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

An island appears 45° to the right of the centre line on an airborne weather
radar display. What is the true bearing of the aircraft from the island if at the
time of observation the aircraft was on a magnetic heading (MH) of 215° with
the magnetic variation (VAR) 21°W?

059°

101°

239°

329°

759 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 678 AviaExam9950 6/10/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

An island appears 30° to the right of the centre line on an airborne weather
radar display. What is the true bearing of the aircraft from the island if at the
time of observation the aircraft was on a magnetic heading (MH) of 355° with
the magnetic variation (VAR) 15°E?

220°

130°

160°

190°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 238

760 61.5.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-f Typ: MC 679 AviaExam9951 6/10/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

An island appears 30° to the left of the centre line on an airborne weather
radar display. What is the true bearing of the aircraft from the island if at the
time of observation the aircraft was on a magnetic heading (MH) of 020° with
the magnetic variation (VAR) 25°W?

145°

195°

205°

325°

761 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 680 AviaExam9959 6/11/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Permanent magnetism in aircraft arises chiefly from:

hammering, and the effect of the earth's magnetic field, whilst under
construction

exposure to the earth's magnetic field during normal operation

the combined effect of aircraft electrical equipment and the earth's


magnetic field

the effect of internal wiring and exposure to electrical storms

762 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 681 AviaExam9962 6/11/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The main reason for usually mounting the detector unit of a remote indicating
compass in the wingtip of an aeroplane is to:

reduce the amount of deviation caused by aircraft magnetism and


electrical circuits

facilitate easy maintenance of the unit and increase its exposure to the
Earth's magnetic field

place it in a position where there is no electrical wiring to cause


deviation errors

place it where it will not be subjected to electrical or magnetic


interference from the aircraft
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 239

763 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 682 AviaExam9967 6/11/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

What additional information is required to be input to an Inertial Navigation


System (INS) in order to obtain an W/V readout?

TAS

IAS

Altitude and OAT

Mach Number

764 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 683 AviaExam9968 6/11/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the name given to an Inertial Reference System (IRS) which has the
gyros and accelerometers as part of the unit's fixture to the aircraft structure?

Strapdown

Rigid

Solid state

Ring laser

765 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 684 AviaExam9970 6/11/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The alignment time, at mid-latitudes, for an Inertial Reference System using


laser ring gyros is approximately:

10 MIN

20 MIN

2 MIN

5 MIN
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 240

766 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 685 AviaExam9971 6/11/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements concerning the alignment procedure for


Inertial Navigation Systems(INS)/Inertial Reference Systems (IRS) at
mid-latitudes is correct?

INS/IRS can be aligned in either the ALIGN or NAV mode

INS/IRS can only be aligned in the ALIGN mode

INS/IRS can be aligned in either the ALIGN or ATT mode

INS/IRS can only be aligned in NAV mode

767 61.6.4 Flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 686 AviaExam9973 6/11/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements concerning the operation of an Inertial


Navigation System (INS)/Inertial Reference System (IRS) is correct?

NAV mode must be selected prior to movement of the aircraft off the
gate

NAV mode must be selected on the runway just prior to take-off

NAV mode must be selected prior to the loading of passengers and/or


freight

NAV mode must be selected when the alignment procedure is


commenced

768 61.6.4 Flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 687 AviaExam9974 6/11/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements concerning the aircraft positions indicated


on a triple fit Inertial Navigation System (INS)/ Inertial Reference System (IRS)
on the CDU is correct?

The positions are likely to differ because they are calculated from
different sources

The positions will be the same because they are an average of three
different positions

The positions will only differ if one of the systems has been decoupled
because of a detected malfunction

The positions will only differ if an error has been made when inputting
the present position at the departure airport
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 241

769 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 688 AviaExam9976 6/30/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

In an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) data relating primarily to


navigation in the FMC is provided by:

Navigation radios
GPS
Inertial Reference Systems
Inertial Reference Systems

Inertial Reference Systems


Aircraft Weather Radar
Navigation radios

GPS
Aircraft Weather Radar
Navigation radios

Inertial Reference Systems


Navigation radios
Terrain Collision Alerting System

770 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 689 AviaExam9979 6/30/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

How does the Electronic Flight Instrument System display of a B737-400


respond to the failure of a VHF navigation (VOR) receiver?

It removes the associated magenta deviation bar and/or pointer from the
display

The pointer rotates around the display and a VOR 1 or 2 failure warning
bar appears

The deviation bar and/or pointer change colour to red and flash
intermittently

The pointer flashes and a VOR 1 or 2 failure warning bar appears

771 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 690 AviaExam9980 6/30/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which component of the B737-400 Electronic Flight Instrument System


generates the visual displays on the EADI and EHSI?

Symbol Generator

Flight Management Computer

Flight Control Computer

Navigation database
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 242

772 61.5.5 Purposes of FMS (flight management systems) Typ: MC 691 AviaExam9991 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which component of the B737-400 Flight Management System (FMS) is used


to enter flight plan routeing and performance parameters?

Multi-Function Control Display Unit

Flight Management Computer

Inertial Reference System

Flight Director System

773 61.5.5 Purposes of FMS (flight management systems) Typ: MC 692 AviaExam9996 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the validity period of the 'permanent' data base of aeronautical


information stored in the FMC In the B737-400 Flight Management System?

28 days

one calendar month

3 calendar months

14 days

774 61.5.5 Purposes of FMS (flight management systems) Typ: MC 693 AviaExam9997 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

In a Flight Management System (FMS), control Display Units (CDUs) are used
pre-flight to

manually initialize the IRSs and FMC with dispatch information

automatically initialize the IRSs and FMC with dispatch information

manually initialize the Flight Director System and FMC with dispatch
information

manually initialise the IRSs, FMC and Air Data Computer with dispatch
information
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 243

775 61.5.5 Purposes of FMS (flight management systems) Typ: MC 694 AviaExam9998 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

How is the radio position determined by the FMC in the B737-400 Electronic
Flight Instrument System?

DME/DME or VOR/DME

VOR/VOR or ADF bearings

DME ranges and/ or VOR/ADF bearings

VOR/DME range and bearing

776 61.5.5 Purposes of FMS (flight management systems) Typ: MC 695 AviaExam10000 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

What are, in order of highest priority followed by lowest, the two levels of
message produced by the CDU of the B737-400 Electronic Flight Instrument
System?

Alerting and Advisory

Urgent and Routine

Priority and Alerting

Urgent and Advisory

777 61.5.5 Purposes of FMS (flight management systems) Typ: MC 696 AviaExam10003 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which FMC/CDU page normally appears on initial power application to the


B737-400 Electronic Flight Instrument System?

IDENT

INITIAL

POS INIT

PERF INIT
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 244

778 61.5.5 Purposes of FMS (flight management systems) Typ: MC 697 AviaExam10004 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following lists the first three pages of the FMC/CDU normally
used on initial start-up of the B737-400 Electronic Flight Instrument System?

IDENT - POS INIT - RTE

POS INIT - RTE - IDENT

IDENT - RTE - DEPARTURE

POS INIT - RTE - DEPARTURE

779 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 698 AviaExam10005 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

For any given circumstances, in order to double the effective range of a


primary radar the power output must be increased by a factor of:

16

780 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 699 AviaExam10006 7/2/1997 Pkt.: 1.00

The prime factor in determining the maximum unambiguous range of a


primary radar is the:

pulse recurrence rate

power output

size of parabolic receiver aerial

height of the transmitter above the ground

781 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 700 AviaExam11528 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

One purpose of a compass calibration is to reduce the difference, if any,


between:

compass north and magnetic north.

compass north and true north.

true north and magnetic north.

compass north and the lubber line.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 245

782 61.2.3 Knowledge of the principles Typ: MC 701 AviaExam11541 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Magnetic compass calibration is carried out to reduce:

deviation.

variation.

parallax error.

acceleration errors.

783 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 702 AviaExam11951 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

At the magnetic equator, when accelerating after take off on heading West, a
direct reading pivot suspended compass:

indicates the correct heading

overreads the heading

underreads the heading

indicates a turn to the south

784 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 703 AviaExam11952 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

On a chart, the distance along a meridian between latitudes 45°N and 46°N is
6 cm. The scale of the chart is approximately:

1: 1 850 000

1: 1 000 000

1: 185 000

1: 18 500 000
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 246

785 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 704 AviaExam11955 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Chart scale is 1: 1 850 000.
The chart distance between two points is 4 centimetres.
Earth distance is approximately:

40 NM

74 NM

100 NM

4 NM

786 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 705 AviaExam11956 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The force acting on the needle of a direct reading compass varies:

directly with the horizontal component of the earth's magnetic field

directly with the vertical component of the earth's magnetic field

inversely with both vertical and horizontal components of the earth's


magnetic field

inversely with the horizontal component of the earth's magnetic field

787 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 706 AviaExam11957 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
An aircraft is on final approach to runway 32R (322°);
The wind velocity reported by the tower is 350°/20 kt.;
TAS on approach is 95 kt.
In order to maintain the centre line, the aircraft's heading (°M) should be:

328°

322°

316°

326°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 247

788 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 707 AviaExam11958 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
VOR station position N61° E025°, variation 13°E;
Estimated position of an aircraft N59° E025°, variation 20°E.
What VOR radial is the aircraft on?

167°

347°

160°

193°

789 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 708 AviaExam11959 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Mercator chart, at latitude 60°N, the distance measured between W002°


and E008° is 20 cm. The scale of this chart at latitude 60°N is approximately:

1: 2 780 000

1: 278 000

1: 5 560 000

1: 556 000

790 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 709 AviaExam11961 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft takes-off from an airport 2 hours before sunset. The pilot flies a
track of 090°(T), W/V 130°/ 20 kt, TAS 100 kt. In order to return to the point of
departure before sunset, the furthest distance which may be travelled is:

97 NM

115 NM

105 NM

84 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 248

791 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 710 AviaExam11965 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Assume a Mercator chart.


The distance between positions A and B, located on the same parallel and 10°
longitude apart, is 6 cm. The scale at the parallel is 1: 9 260 000.
What is the latitude of A and B?

60° N or S

30° N or S

45° N or S

792 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 711 AviaExam11966 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert chart (standard parallels 37°N and 65°N), with respect to the
straight line drawn on the map between A ( N49° W030°) and B (N48° W040°),
the:

great circle and rhumb line are to the south

great circle and rhumb line are to the north

great circle is to the north, the rhumb line is to the south

rhumb line is to the north, the great circle is to the south

793 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 712 AviaExam11967 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
ETA to cross a meridian is 2100 UTC
GS is 441 kt
TAS is 491 kt
At 2010 UTC, ATC requests a speed reduction to cross the meridian at 2105
UTC.
The reduction to TAS will be approximately:

40 kt

90 kt

75 kt

60 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 249

794 61.5.4 Flight log (including navigation records) Typ: MC 713 AviaExam11968 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The flight log gives the following data:


"True track, Drift, True heading, Magnetic variation, Magnetic heading,
Compass deviation, Compass heading"
The right solution, in the same order, is:

119°, 3°L, 122°, 2°E, 120°, +4°, 116°

115°, 5°R, 120°, 3°W, 123°, +2°, 121°

117°, 4°L, 121°, 1°E, 122°, -3°, 119°

125°, 2°R, 123°, 2°W, 121°, -4°, 117°

795 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 714 AviaExam11969 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Concerning direct reading magnetic compasses, in the northern hemisphere,


it can be said that:

on an Easterly heading, a longitudinal acceleration causes an apparent


turn to the North

on an Easterly heading, a longitudinal acceleration causes an apparent


turn to the South

on a Westerly heading, a longitudinal acceleration causes an apparent


turn to the South

on a Westerly heading, a longitudinal deceleration causes an apparent


turn to the North

796 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 715 AviaExam11970 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

At 0020 UTC an aircraft is crossing the 310° radial at 40 NM of a VOR/DME


station.
At 0035 UTC the radial is 040° and DME distance is 40 NM.
Magnetic variation is zero.
The true track and ground speed are:

085° - 226 kt

090° - 232 kt

080° - 226 kt

088° - 232 kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 250

797 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 716 AviaExam11971 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A straight line on a chart 4.89 cm long represents 185 NM.


The scale of this chart is approximately:

1: 7 000 000

1: 3 500 000

1: 6 000 000

1: 5 000 000

798 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 717 AviaExam11972 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

From the departure point, the distance to the point of equal time is:

inversely proportional to the sum of ground speed out and ground


speed back

proportional to the sum of ground speed out and ground speed back

inversely proportional to the total distance to go

inversely proportional to ground speed back

799 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 718 AviaExam11973 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Required course 045°(M);
Variation is 15°E;
W/V is 190°(T)/30 kt;
CAS is 120 kt at FL 55 in standard atmosphere.
What are the heading (°M) and GS?

055° and 147 kt

036° and 151 kt

052° and 154 kt

056° and 137 kt


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 251

800 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 719 AviaExam11974 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Airport elevation is 1000 ft.
QNH is 988 hPa.
What is the approximate airport pressure altitude?
(Assume 1 hPa = 27 FT)

1680 FT

320 FT

680 FT

- 320 FT

801 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 720 AviaExam11975 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The circumference of the parallel of latitude at 60°N is approximately:

10 800 NM

18 706 NM

20 000 NM

34 641 NM

802 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 721 AviaExam11976 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Morning Civil twilight begins when:

the centre of the sun is 6° below the celestial horizon

the centre of the sun is 12° below the celestial horizon

the centre of the sun is 18° below the celestial horizon

the sun's upper edge is tangential to the celestial horizon

803 61.1.1 The solar system Typ: MC 722 AviaExam11978 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Seasons are due to the:

inclination of the polar axis with the ecliptic plane

Earth's elliptical orbit around the Sun

Earth's rotation on its polar axis

variable distance between Earth and Sun


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 252

804 61.1.5 Distance Typ: MC 723 AviaExam11979 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Position 'A' N60 W020,
Position 'B' N60 W021,
Position 'C' N59 W020.
What are, respectively, the distances from A to B and from A to C?

30 NM and 60 NM

52 NM and 60 NM

60 NM and 30 NM

60 NM and 52 NM

805 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 724 AviaExam11980 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True altitude 9000 FT,
OAT -32°C,
CAS 200 kt.
What is the TAS?

220 kt

215 kt

200 kt

210 kt

806 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 725 AviaExam11981 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
An aircraft is flying a track of 255°(M),
2254 UTC, it crosses radial 360° from a VOR station,
2300 UTC, it crosses radial 330° from the same station.
At 2300 UTC, the distance between the aircraft and the station is:

the same as it was at 2254 UTC

greater than it was at 2254 UTC

randomly different than it was at 2254 UTC

less than it was at 2254 UTC


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 253

807 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 726 AviaExam11982 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The distance between two waypoints is 200 NM,


To calculate compass heading, the pilot used 2°E magnetic variation instead
of 2°W.
Assuming that the forecast W/V applied, what will the off track distance be at
the second waypoint?

14 NM

7 NM

0 NM

21 NM

808 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 727 AviaExam11984 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The scale on a Lambert conformal conic chart:

is constant along a parallel of latitude

is constant along a meridian of longitude

is constant across the whole map

varies slightly as a function of latitude and longitude

809 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 728 AviaExam11985 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A direct Mercator graticule is based on a projection that is:

cylindrical

conical

spherical

concentric
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 254

810 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 729 AviaExam11988 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Aircraft at FL 150 overhead an airport
Elevation of airport 720 FT.
QNH is 1003 hPa.
OAT at FL150 -5°C.
What is the true altitude of the aircraft?
(Assume 1 hPa = 27 FT)

15 280 FT

15 840 FT

14 160 FT

14 720 FT

811 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 730 AviaExam11989 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft takes off from the aerodrome of KEEKOROK (altitude 1 483 FT,
QFE = 963 hPa, temperature = 32°C).
Five minutes later, passing 5 000 FT on QFE, the second altimeter set on 1
013 hPa will indicate approximately:(USE 1 HPA = 30 FT)

6 500 FT

6 800 FT

6 300 FT

4 000 FT

812 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 731 AviaExam11991 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Distance A to B is 360 NM.
Wind component A - B is -15 kt,
Wind component B - A is +15 kt,
TAS is 180 kt.
What is the distance from the equal-time-point to B?

165 NM

195 NM

180 NM

170 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 255

813 61.5.3 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to rev Typ: MC 732 AviaExam11992 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Half way between two reporting points the navigation log gives the following
information:
TAS 360 kt,
W/V 330°/80kt,
Compass heading 237°,
Deviation on this heading -5°,
Variation 19°W.
What is the average ground speed for this leg?

403 kt

354 kt

373 kt

360 kt

814 61.5.4 Flight log (including navigation records) Typ: MC 733 AviaExam11993 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-017.jpg
Given:
TAS is120 kt.
ATA 'X' 1232 UTC,
ETA 'Y' 1247 UTC,
ATA 'Y' is 1250 UTC.
What is ETA 'Z'?

1302 UTC

1257 UTC

1300 UTC

1303 UTC

815 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 734 AviaExam11994 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A negative (westerly) magnetic variation signifies that:

True North is East of Magnetic North

True North is West of Magnetic North

Compass North is East of Magnetic North

Compass North is West of Magnetic North


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 256

816 61.2.2 Aircraft magnetism Typ: MC 735 AviaExam11995 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In northern hemisphere, during an acceleration in an easterly direction, the


magnetic compass will indicate:

a decrease in heading

an increase in heading

an apparent turn to the South

a heading of East

817 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 736 AviaExam11998 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
The coordinates of the heliport at Issy les Moulineaux are N48°50' E002°16.5'.
What are the coordinates of the position directly on the opposite side of the
earth?

S48°50' W177°43.5'

S48°50' E177°43.5'

S41°10' W177°43.5'

S41°10' E177°43.5'

818 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 737 AviaExam12000 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Course 040°(T),
TAS is 120 kt,
Wind speed 30 kt.
Maximum drift angle will be obtained for a wind direction of:

130°

145°

115°

120°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 257

819 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 738 AviaExam12001 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
CAS 120 kt,
FL 80,
OAT +20°C.
What is the TAS?

141 kt

102 kt

120 kt

132 kt

820 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 739 AviaExam12003 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Isogonals are lines of equal:

magnetic variation.

compass deviation.

pressure.

wind velocity.

821 61.2.1 General principles Typ: MC 740 AviaExam12004 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

At a specific location, the value of magnetic variation:

varies slowly over time

depends on the type of compass installed

depends on the magnetic heading

depends on the true heading

822 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 741 AviaExam12005 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Parallels of latitude, except the equator, are:

Rhumb lines

Great circles

both Rhumb lines and Great circles

are neither Rhumb lines nor Great circles


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 258

823 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 742 AviaExam12006 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
FL120,
OAT is ISA standard,
CAS is 200 kt,
Track is 222°(M),
Heading is 215°(M),
Variation is 15°W.
Time to fly 105 NM is 21 MIN.
What is the W/V?

050°(T) / 70 kt.

040°(T) / 105 kt.

055°(T) / 105 kt .

065°(T) / 70 kt.

824 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 743 AviaExam12008 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

At latitude 60°N the scale of a Mercator projection is 1: 5 000 000. The length
on the chart between 'C' N60° E008° and 'D' N60° W008° is:

17.8 cm

16.2 cm

35.6 cm

19.2 cm

825 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 744 AviaExam12009 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
A is N55° 000°
B is N54° E010°
The average true course of the great circle is 100°.
The true course of the rhumbline at point A is:

100°

096°

104°

107°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 259

826 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 745 AviaExam12010 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The two standard parallels of a conical Lambert projection are at N10°40'N


and N41°20'.
The cone constant of this chart is approximatively:

0.44

0.90

0.66

0.18

827 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 746 AviaExam12011 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Position 'A' is N00° E100°,
Position 'B' is 240°(T), 200 NM from 'A'.
What is the position of 'B'?

S01°40' E097°07'

N01°40' E097°07'

S01°40' E101°40'

N01°40' E101°40'

828 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 747 AviaExam12014 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The BFO selector switch on the ADF control panel must be in the 'on' position
to enable the pilot to:

hear the IDENT of NDBs using NON A1A transmissions

adjust the loop to the aural null position

stop the loop rotation

hear the IDENT of NDBs using NON A2A transmissions


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 260

829 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 748 AviaExam12015 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is on the 120° radial from a VOR station. Course 340° is selected
on the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator).
If the magnetic heading is 070°, the deviation bar relative to the aeroplane
model, will be:

behind.

in front.

right.

left.

830 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 749 AviaExam12016 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A pilot accidently turning OFF the INS in flight, and then turns it back ON a
few moments later. Following this incident:

it can only be used for attitude reference

no useful information can be obtained from the INS

everything returns to normal and is usable

the INS is usable in NAV MODE after a position update

831 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 750 AviaExam12019 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

You are on a compass heading of 090° on the 255 radial from a VOR. You set
the course 190° on your OBS. The deviation bar will show:

Full scale deflection left with a 'from' indication

Full scale deflection right with a 'from' indication

Full scale deflection left with a 'to' indication

Full scale deflection right with a 'to' indication


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 261

832 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 751 AviaExam12020 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A pilot flying an aircraft at FL 80, tunes in a VOR which has an elevation of 313
m. Given ISA conditions, what is the maximum theoretical distance at which a
pilot might expect to receive the VOR signals?

151 NM

180 NM

100 NM

120 NM

833 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 752 AviaExam12021 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The OBS is set to 235°. The indications of the VOR are half full scale
deflection left and 'to'. The aircraft is on the radial:

050°

230°

060°

240°

834 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 753 AviaExam12022 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft passes overhead a DME station at 12000 feet above the station. At
that time, the DME reading will be:

approximately 2 NM.

0 NM.

FLAG/OFF, the aircraft is within the cone of silence.

fluctuating and not significant.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 262

835 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 754 AviaExam12023 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

GPS system satellites transmit their signals on two carrier waves 1575 MHz
and 1227 MHz and supply two possible codes accessible according to user
(civil or military).
Commercial aviation uses:

only the 1 575 MHz carrier wave and one code

only the 1 575 MHz carrier wave and two codes

only the 1 227 MHz carrier wave and one code

the two carrier waves and one public code

836 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 755 AviaExam12024 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A weather radar, set to the 100 NM scale, shows a squall at 50NM. By


changing the scale to 50 NM, the return on the radar screen should:

increase in area and move to the top of the screen

increase in area and appear nearer to the bottom of the screen

decrease in area but not change in position on the screen

decrease in area and move to the top of the screen

837 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 756 AviaExam12028 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A cumulonimbus cloud in the vicinity of an aeroplane can cause certain


navigation systems to give false indications.
This is particularly true of the:

ADF

VOR

weather radar

DME
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 263

838 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 757 AviaExam12029 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In weather radar the use of a cosecant beam in 'Mapping' mode enables:

scanning of a large ground zone producing echos whose signals are


practically independent of distance

better reception of echos on contrasting terrain such as ground to sea

a greater radar range to be achieved

higher definition echoes to be produced giving a clearer picture

839 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 758 AviaExam12030 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An ADF provides the aircraft with bearing information with respect to a


ground station.
To do this, the ground station emits a signal pattern which is:

omnidirectional

frequency modulated at 30 Hertz

a beam rotating at 30 Hertz

unidirectional

840 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 759 AviaExam12031 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft, at FL 410 is passing overhead a DME station at mean sea level.


The DME indicates approximately:

6.8 NM

6.8 km

6.1 NM

6.1 km
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 264

841 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 760 AviaExam12032 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A VOR and an ADF are co-located. In NIL wind conditions you cross the VOR
radial of 240 on a heading of 360°(M). In the vicinity of the station you should
read an ADF bearing of:

060

240

300

120

842 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 761 AviaExam12035 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The code transmitted by a SSR transponder consists of:

pulses

phase differences

frequency differences

amplitude differences

843 61.6.5 INS operation Typ: MC 762 AviaExam12037 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The sensors of an INS measure:

acceleration

velocity

the horizontal component of the earth's rotation

precession

844 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 763 AviaExam12038 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The Flight Management System (FMS) is organised in such a way that the pilot
can:

insert navigation data between two database updates

modify the data in the database between two updates

modify the database every 14 days

read and write at any time in the database


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 265

845 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 764 AviaExam12041 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The operating principle of a DME is the measurement of the:

time between the transmission and reception of radio pulses

frequency change between the emitted wave and reflected wave

frequency of the reflected wave

phase difference between emitted wave and reflected wave

846 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 765 AviaExam12042 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

DME channels operate in the frequency band which includes:

1 000 MHz

110 MHz

300 MHz

600 MHz

847 61.6.4 Flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 766 AviaExam12044 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Waypoints can be entered in an INS memory in different formats.


In which of the following formats can waypoints be entered into all INSs?

geographic coordinates

bearing and distance

hexadecimal

by waypoints name

848 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 767 AviaExam12045 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

You are on a magnetic heading of 055° and your ADF indicates a relative
bearing of 325°. The QDM is:

020°

200°

055°

235°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 266

849 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 768 AviaExam12047 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft at FL300, with a groundspeed of 300 kt, is about pass overhead a


DME station at MSL. The DME receiver is capable of determining
ground-speed.
One minute before the overhead, DME speed and distance indications are
respectively:

less than 300 kt and 7 NM.

300 kt and 7 NM.

less than 300 kt and 5 NM.

300 kt and 5 NM.

850 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 769 AviaExam12049 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
W/V (T) 230/ 20 kt,
Var. 6E,
TAS 80 kt
What relative bearing from an NDB should be maintained in order to achieve
an outbound course of 257°(M) from overhead the beacon?

188

172

008

352

851 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 770 AviaExam12050 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

On the QDR of 075° (in the vicinity of the station) with a magnetic heading of
295°, the relative bearing on the ADF indicator is:

320°

040°

220°

140°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 267

852 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 771 AviaExam12051 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

When flying at 6000 feet above ground level, the DME indicates 5 NM. What is
the horizontal distance from the aircraft to overhead the DME?

4.9 NM

5.2 NM

4.6 NM

4.3 NM

853 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 772 AviaExam12052 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is situated at 30°N - 005°E with a magnetic variation of 10°W.


A VOR is located at 30°N - 013°E with a magnetic variation of 15°W.
The aircraft is situated on the VOR radial:

286°

281°

101°

256°

854 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 773 AviaExam12053 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Your aircraft is heading 075°M. The OBI is set to 025°. The VOR indications
are 'TO' with the needle showing right deflection. Relative to the stations, you
are situated in a quadrant defined by the radials:

205° and 295°

295° and 025°

025° and 115°

115° and 205°


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 268

855 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 774 AviaExam12056 4/28/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The OBS is set on 048°, TO appears in the window. The needle is close to full
right deflection. The VOR radial is approximately:

238°

058°

038°

218°

856 62.1.6 MLS Typ: MC 775 AviaExam12378 5/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following methods is used by a Microwave Landing System


(MLS) to indicate distance from the runway threshold?

A precision facility DME

Timing the interval between the transmission and reception of primary


radar pulses from the aircraft to MLS station

Measurement of the frequency shift between the MLS azimuth and


elevation transmissions

Timing the interval between the reception of sequential secondary radar


pulses from the MLS station to the aircraft

857 62.1.6 MLS Typ: MC 776 AviaExam12379 5/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following correctly lists the major ground based
components of a Microwave Landing System (MLS)?

Separate azimuth and elevation transmitters, DME facility

Separate azimuth and elevation transmitters, outer and middle marker


beacons

Combined azimuth and elevation transmitter, DME facility

Combined azimuth and elevation transmitter, outer and inner marker


beacons
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 269

858 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 777 AviaExam12380 5/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In which frequency band do most airborne weather radars operate?

SHF

UHF

EHF

VHF

859 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 778 AviaExam12381 5/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The maximum range obtainable from an ATC Long Range Surveillance Radar
is approximately:

200-300 NM

100-200 NM

50-100 NM

300-400 NM

860 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 779 AviaExam12385 5/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In Airborne Weather Radar (AWR), the main factors which determine whether
a cloud will be detected are:

size of the water drops;


wavelength/frequency used

range from cloud;


wavelength/frequency used

size of the water drops;


diameter of radar scanner

rotational speed of radar scanner;


range from cloud
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 270

861 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 780 AviaExam12386 5/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to ascertain whether a cloud return on an Aircraft Weather Radar


(AWR) is at or above the height of the aircraft, the tilt control should be set to:
(Assume a beam width of 5°)

2.5° up

2.5° down

5° up

862 62.6.3 Loran-C Typ: MC 781 AviaExam12389 5/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Loran C coverage is:

confined to certain limited areas of the world

global

unrestricted between latitudes 70°N and 70°S

unrestricted over the oceans and adjacent coastlines but limited over
the major continental land masses

863 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 782 AviaExam12390 5/29/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The angle between Magnetic North and Compass North is called:

compass deviation

compass error

magnetic variation

alignment error
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 271

864 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 783 AviaExam12391 5/29/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The north and south magnetic poles are the only positions on the earth's
surface where:

a freely suspended compass needle would stand vertical

a position where the horizontal component of the earth's magnetic field


is a maximum

a freely suspended compass needle will stand horizontal

the value of magnetic variation equals 90°

865 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 784 AviaExam12392 5/29/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Direct Mercator chart, meridians are:

parallel, equally spaced, vertical straight lines

inclined, equally spaced, straight lines that meet at the nearer pole

parallel, unequally spaced, vertical straight lines

inclined, unequally spaced, curved lines that meet at the nearer pole

866 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 785 AviaExam12393 6/1/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

On which of the following chart projections is it NOT possible to represent the


north or south poles?

Direct Mercator

Lambert's conformal

Transverse Mercator

Polar stereographic
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 272

867 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 786 AviaExam12394 6/1/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following, concerning great circles on a Direct Mercator


chart, is correct?

With the exception of meridians and the equator, they are curves
concave to the equator

They are all curves concave to the equator

They approximate to straight lines between the standard parallels

They are all curves convex to the equator

868 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 787 AviaExam12395 6/1/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Lambert conformal conic chart, the distance between parallels of


latitude spaced the same number of degrees apart:

reduces between, and expands outside, the standard parallels

is constant between, and expands outside, the standard parallels

expands between, and reduces outside, the standard parallels

is constant throughout the chart

869 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 788 AviaExam12396 6/1/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following statements is correct concerning the appearance


of great circles, with the exception of meridians, on a Polar Stereographic
chart whose tangency is at the pole ?

The higher the latitude the closer they approximate to a straight line

Any straight line is a great circle

They are complex curves that can be convex and/or concave to the Pole

They are curves convex to the Pole


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 273

870 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 789 AviaExam12397 6/2/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following describes the appearance of rhumb lines, except
meridians, on a Polar Stereographic chart?

Curves concave to the Pole

Ellipses around the Pole

Curves convex to the Pole

Straight lines

871 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 790 AviaExam12398 6/2/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the value of the convergence factor on a Polar Stereographic chart?

1.0

0.866

0.5

0.0

872 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 791 AviaExam12399 6/2/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Direct Mercator, rhumb lines are:

straight lines

curves concave to the equator

ellipses

curves convex to the equator


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 274

873 61.4.4 Determination of DR position Typ: MC 792 AviaExam12406 6/10/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A useful method of a pilot resolving, during a visual flight, any uncertainty in


the aircraft's position is to maintain visual contact with the ground and:

set heading towards a line feature such as a coastline, motorway, river


or railway

fly the reverse of the heading being flown prior to becoming uncertain
until a pinpoint is obtained

fly expanding circles until a pinpoint is obtained

fly reverse headings and associated timings until the point of departure
is regained

874 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 793 AviaExam12407 7/10/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following lists information given by a basic VOR/DME-based


Area Navigation System?

Crosstrack distance; alongtrack distance; angular course deviation

Aircraft position in latitude and longitude

Wind velocity

True airspeed; drift angle

875 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 794 AviaExam12408 7/10/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following lists information required to input a waypoint or


'Phantom Station' into a basic VOR/DME-based Area Navigation System?

Radial and distance from a VOR/DME to the waypoint or 'Phantom


Station'

Magnetic track and distance from the aircraft to the waypoint or


'Phantom Station'

Magnetic track and distance to a VOR/DME from the waypoint or


'Phantom Station'

Radials from a minimum of two VORs to the waypoint or 'Phantom


Station'
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 275

876 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 795 AviaExam12409 7/10/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-018.jpg
Which of the distances indicated will be shown on a basic VOR/DME-based
Area Navigation Equipment when using a 'Phantom Station'?

12 NM

21 NM

10 NM

11 NM

877 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 796 AviaExam12410 7/10/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-019.jpg
Which of the distances indicated will be shown on a basic VOR/DME-based
Area Navigation Equipment when using a 'Phantom Station' at position 'X'?

9 NM

11 NM

14 NM

8 NM

878 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 797 AviaExam12413 7/10/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Erratic indications may be experienced when flying towards a basic


VOR/DME-based Area Navigation System 'Phantom Station':

when operating at low altitudes close to the limit of reception range from
the reference station

because, under adverse conditions (relative bearing to the Phantom


Station other than 180°/360°) it takes the computer more time to
calculate the necessary information

when in the cone of silence overhead the Phantom Station

when the Phantom Station is out of range


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 276

879 62.5.5 VOR/DME area navigation Typ: MC 798 AviaExam12416 7/10/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is one of the functions of the Computer in a basic


RNAV system?

It transfers the information given by a VOR/DME station into tracking


and distance indications to any chosen Phantom Station/waypoint

It checks the ground station accuracy using a built-in test programme

It automatically selects the two strongest transmitters for the


Area-Nav-Mode and continues working by memory in case one of the
two necessary station goes off the air

It calculates cross track information for NDB approaches

880 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 799 AviaExam12417 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following combinations of satellite navigation systems provide


the most accurate position fixes in air navigation?

NAVSTAR/GPS and GLONASS

NAVSTAR/GPS and NNSS-Transit

NNSS-Transit and GLONASS

GLONASS and COSPAS-SARSAT

881 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 800 AviaExam12418 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The required 24 NAVSTAR/GPS operational satellites are located on:

6 orbital planes with 4 satellites in each plane

3 orbital planes with 8 satellites in each plane

4 orbital planes with 6 satellites in each plane

6 orbital planes with 3 satellites in each plane plus 6 reserve satellites


positioned in a geostationary orbital plane
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 277

882 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 801 AviaExam12419 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements about the 'visibility' of NAVSTAR/GPS


satellites is correct?

It varies, depending on the time and observer's location

It is the same throughout the globe

It is greatest at the equator

It is greatest at the poles

883 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 802 AviaExam12420 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

How many operational satellites are required for Full Operational Capability
(FOC) of the satellite navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS?

24

18

12

30

884 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 803 AviaExam12421 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following satellite navigation systems has Full Operational


Capability (FOC) and is approved for specified flights under IFR conditions in
Europe?

NAVSTAR/GPS

NNSS-Transit

COSPAS-SARSAT

GLONASS

885 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 804 AviaExam12422 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The different segments of the satellite navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS are


the:

control, space and user

main control station, the monitoring station and the ground antennas

antenna, the receiver and the central control unit (CDU)

atomic clock, power supply and transponder


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 278

886 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 805 AviaExam12423 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

One of the tasks of the control segment of the satellite navigation system
NAVSTAR/GPS is to:

monitor the status of the satellites

manufacture and launch the satellites

manipulate the signals of selected satellites to reduce the precision of


the position fix

grant and monitor user authorisations

887 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 806 AviaExam12424 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The main task of the user segment (receiver) of the satellite navigation system
NAVSTAR/GPS is to:

select appropriate satellites automatically, to track the signals and to


measure the time taken by signals from the satellites to reach the
receiver

transmit signals which, from the time taken, are used to determine the
distance to the satellite

to monitor the status of the satellites, determine their positions and to


measure the time

monitor the orbital planes of the satellites

888 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 807 AviaExam12425 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

One of the tasks of the space segment of the satellite navigation system
NAVSTAR/GPS is to:

transmit signals which can be used, by suitable receivers, to determine


time, position and velocity

transmit signals to suitable receivers and to monitor the orbital planes


autonomously

compute the user position from the received user messages and to
transmit the computed position back to the user segment

monitor the satellites' orbits and status


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 279

889 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 808 AviaExam12426 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The geometric shape of the reference system for the satellite navigation
system NAVSTAR/GPS, defined as WGS 84, is:

an ellipsoid

a mathematical model that describes the exact shape of the earth

a sphere

a geoid

890 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 809 AviaExam12427 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In civil aviation, the height value computed by the receiver of the satellite
navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS is the:

height above the WGS-84 ellipsoid

geometric height above ground

height above Mean Sea Level (MSL)

flight level

891 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 810 AviaExam12428 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to the satellite navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS,


the term 'inclination' denotes the angle between the:

orbital plane and the equatorial plane

horizontal plane at the location of the receiver and the direct line to a
satellite

orbital plane and the earth's axis

horizontal plane at the location of the receiver and the orbital plane of a
satellite
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 280

892 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 811 AviaExam12429 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

How long does it take a NAVSTAR/GPS satellite to orbit the earth?

Approximately 12 hours (1/2 of a sidereal day)

Approximately 24 hours (one sidereal day)

12 days

365 days because the satellites are located in a geostationary orbit

893 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 812 AviaExam12430 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

At what approximate height above the WGS-84 ellipsoid are NAVSTAR/GPS


satellites circling the earth?

20200 km

10900 km

36000 km

19500 km

894 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 813 AviaExam12431 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The orbital planes of the satellite navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS are:

inclined 55° to the equatorial plane

inclined 55° to the earth axis

inclined 90° to the equatorial plane

parallel to the equatorial plane

895 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 814 AviaExam12432 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In which frequency bands are the L1 and L2 frequencies used by the satellite
navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS for transmission of the navigation
message?

UHF

VHF

EHF

SHF
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 281

896 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 815 AviaExam12433 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to the satellite navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS, which of the


following statements correctly describes the term 'Pseudo Random Noise
(PRN)' signal?

PRN is a code used for the identification of the satellites and the
measurement of the time taken by the signal to reach the receiver

PRN is the atmospheric jamming that affects the signals transmitted by


the satellites

PRN describes the continuous electro-magnetic background noise that


exists in space

PRN occurs in the receiver. It is caused by the signal from one satellite
being received from different directions (multipath effect)

897 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 816 AviaExam12434 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system codes can


be processed by 'unauthorised' civil aviation receivers?

C/A

C/A- and P

P and Y

898 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 817 AviaExam12435 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Almanac data stored in the receiver of the satellite navigation system


NAVSTAR/GPS is used for the:

fast identification of received signals coming from visible satellites

recognition whether Selective Availability (SA) is operative

assignment of received PRN-codes (Pseudo Random Noise) to the


appropriate satellite

correction of receiver clock error


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 282

899 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 818 AviaExam12436 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

How does a NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system receiver recognise


which of the received signals belongs to which satellite?

Each satellite transmits its signal, on common frequencies, with an


individual Pseudo Random Noise code

The Doppler shift is unique to each satellite

The receiver detects the direction from which the signals are received
and compares this information with the calculated positions of the
satellites

Each satellite transmits its signal on a separate frequency

900 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 819 AviaExam12437 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following data, in addition to the Pseudo Random Noise (PRN)
code, forms part of the so called 'Navigation Message' transmitted by
NAVSTAR/GPS satellites?

almanac data; satellite status information

time; data to impair the accuracy of the position fix

data to correct receiver clock error; almanac data

time; positions of the satellites

901 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 820 AviaExam12438 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system, what is the maximum time


taken to receive the complete set of almanac data from all satellites?

12.5 minutes (= 30 seconds per data frame)

12 hours (= period of the satellites orbit)

25 seconds (= 1 second per data frame)

24 seconds (= 1 second per data frame)


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 283

902 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 821 AviaExam12439 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements concerning the L1 and L2 NAVSTAR/GPS


transmission frequencies and codes is correct?

The higher frequency is used to transmit both the C/A and P codes

C/A and P codes are transmitted at different times on both frequencies

The higher frequency is only used to transmit the P code

The lower frequency is used to transmit both the C/A and P codes

903 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 822 AviaExam12440 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following errors can be compensated for by a


NAVSTAR/GPS receiver comparing L1 and L2 frequencies?

Ionospheric

Multipath

Tropospheric

Receiver noise

904 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 823 AviaExam12443 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Concerning the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system, what is the


meaning of the term 'Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring' (RAIM)?

It is a technique by which a receiver ensures the integrity of the


navigation information

It is the ability of the GPS satellites to check the integrity of the data
transmitted by the monitoring stations of the ground segment

It is a method whereby a receiver ensures the integrity of the Pseudo


Random Noise (PRN) code transmitted by the satellites

It is a technique whereby the receivers of the world-wide distributed


monitor stations (ground segment) automatically determines the
integrity of the navigation message
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 284

905 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 824 AviaExam12444 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The distance between a NAVSTAR/GPS satellite and receiver is:

determined by the time taken for the signal to arrive from the satellite
multiplied by the speed of light

calculated from the Doppler shift of the known frequencies

calculated, using the WGS-84 reference system, from the known


positions of the satellite and the receiver

determined by the phase shift of the Pseudo Random Noise code


multiplied by the speed of light

906 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 825 AviaExam12445 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to the satellite navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS, 'All in View' is a


term used when a receiver:

is tracking more than the required 4 satellites and can instantly replace
any lost signal with another already being monitored

is receiving the signals of all visible satellites but tracking only those of
the 4 with the best geometric coverage

is receiving and tracking the signals of all 24 operational satellites


simultaneously

requires the signals of all visible satellites for navigation purposes

907 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 826 AviaExam12446 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The reason why the measured distance between a NAVSTAR/GPS satellite


navigation system satellite and a receiver is called a 'Pseudo-Range' is
because the:

calculated range includes receiver clock error

measured distance is based on the Pseudo Random Noise code

movement of satellite and receiver during the distance calculation is not


taken into account

calculated range is based on an idealised Keplerian orbit


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 285

908 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 827 AviaExam12447 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

What type of satellite navigation system NAVSTAR/GPS receiver is most


suitable for use on board an aircraft?

Multichannel

Sequential

Multiplex

Any hand held type

909 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 828 AviaExam12448 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the minimum number of NAVSTAR/GPS satellites required to produce


an accurate independent 3-D position fix?

24

910 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 829 AviaExam12449 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The receiver aerial for a NAVSTAR/GPS system should be mounted:

on the upper side of the fuselage in the vicinity of the centre of gravity

inside the tail fin to minimise the influence of reflections from the wing
and fuselage

in the vicinity of the receiver to avoid long transmission lines

under the fuselage in order to receive correction data transmitted by


D-GPS stations
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 286

911 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 830 AviaExam12450 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system, re-use of Selective


Availability would give the option to artificially degrade the accuracy by:

dithering the satellite clock

shutting off selected satellites

using a less accurate atomic clock in a satellite for signal processing

offsetting satellite atomic clocks by a predetermined constant amount

912 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 831 AviaExam12451 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In the event of the re-use of Selective Availability, how does this affect, if at
all, the navigation accuracy of the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system
?

It degrades position accuracy by manipulating satellite signals

It increases because only signals from satellites in the most suitable


geometric constellation are selected by the receiver

It has no influence because, by selecting of the most suitable signals,


the computing process in the receiver is quicker

It degrades accuracy by reducing the number of available satellites

913 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 832 AviaExam12452 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system, receiver clock error:

is corrected by using signals from four satellites

is the biggest part of the total error; it cannot be corrected

can be minimised by synchronisation of the receiver clock with the


satellite clocks

is negligible small because of the great accuracy the atomic clocks


installed in the satellites
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 287

914 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 833 AviaExam12454 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The influence of the ionosphere on the accuracy of the satellite navigation


system NAVSTAR/GPS is:

minimised by the receiver using a model of the atmosphere and


comparing signals transmitted by the satellites

minimised by computing the average of all signals

only significant if the satellites are located at a small elevation angle


above the horizon

negligible

915 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 834 AviaExam12456 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following is an advantages of a multi-sensor system using


inputs from a global navigation satellite system (GNSS) and an inertial
navigational system (INS)?

The GNSS can be used to update a drifting INS

The activation of 'Selective Availability' can be recognised by the INS

The average position calculated from data provided by both systems


increases overall accuracy

The only advantage of coupling both systems is double redundancy

916 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 835 AviaExam12457 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

What are the effects, if any, of shadowing by parts of the aircraft (e.g. wing) on
the reception of signals from NAVSTAR/GPS satellites?

It may prevent the reception of signals

It causes multipath propagation

The signals will be distorted, however the error can be corrected for
using an algorithm and information from unaffected signals

It has no influence because high frequency signals are unaffected


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 288

917 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 836 AviaExam12458 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following geometric satellite constellations provides the most


accurate NAVSTAR/GPS position fix?

3 satellites with a low elevation above the horizon and an azimuth of


120° from each other together with a fourth directly overhead

3 satellites with an azimuth of 120° from each other and an elevation of


45° above the horizon

4 satellites with an azimuth of 90° from each other and a low elevation
above the horizon

4 satellites with an azimuth of 90° from each other and an elevation of


45° above the horizon

918 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 837 AviaExam12459 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system, what is involved


in the differential technique (D-GPS)?

Fixed ground stations compute position errors and transmit correction


data to a suitable receiver on the aircraft

The difference between signals transmitted on the L1 and L2


frequencies are processed by the receiver to determine an error
correction

Receivers from various manufacturers are operated in parallel to reduce


the characteristic receiver noise error

Signals from satellites are received by 2 different antennas which are


located a fixed distance apart. This enables a suitable receiver on the
aircraft to recognise and correct for multipath errors
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 289

919 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 838 AviaExam12460 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following statements about the accuracy that can be obtained
with the differential technique (D-GPS) of the satellite navigation system
NAVSTAR/GPS is correct?

The nearer a receiver is situated to a D-GPS ground station, the more


accurate the position fix

The increase in accuracy of position fixes is independent of the receiver


position in relation to a D-GPS ground station

A D-GPS receiver can detect and correct for SA providing a more


accurate position fix

Only D-GPS allows position fixes accurate enough for 'Non Precision
Approaches'

920 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 839 AviaExam12461 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

How does a receiver of the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system


determine the elevation and azimuth data of a satellite relative to the location
of the antenna?

It calculates it by using Almanac data transmitted by the satellites

The data is stored in the receiver together with the Pseudo Random
Noise (PRN) code

The data is based on the direction to the satellite determined at the


location of the antenna

The data is determined by the satellite and transmitted together with the
navigation message

921 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 840 AviaExam12462 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system, 'Search the Sky'


is a:

procedure that starts after switching on a receiver if there is no stored


satellite data available

continuous process by the ground segment to monitor the GPS


satellites

procedure performed by the receiver to recognise new satellites


becoming operational

continuous procedure performed by the receiver that searches the sky


for satellites rising above the horizon
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 290

922 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 841 AviaExam12463 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the procedure to be followed if, on a flight under IFR conditions using
the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system, the number of satellites
required to maintain the RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring)
function are not available?

The flight may be continued using other certificated navigation systems

The flight has to be continued under VFR conditions

A constant heading and speed must be flown until the required number
of satellites are again available

The flight may be continued as planned if at least 4 satellites are


available and the pilot monitors the GPS-System manually

923 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 842 AviaExam12465 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following, if any, is a prerequisite if a receiver of a


NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system is to be used in combination with a
multi sensor system?

The prescribed IFR-equipment must be installed and operational

The prescribed IFR-equipment must be in working correctly and the


navigation information continuously displayed

The RAIM-function of the GPS receiver must be able to monitor all


prescribed navigation systems

Multi-sensor systems are not certificated for flights under IFR conditions

924 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 843 AviaExam12466 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following procedures must be adopted if, on a flight under IFR
conditions using a NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation system receiver, the
position fix obtained from the GPS receiver differs from the position of
conventional navigation systems by an unacceptable amount?

It may be continued using conventional navigation systems

It may be continued using NAVSTAR/GPS; prior to the next flight all


systems must be checked

It must be continued under VFR conditions

The pilot must determine the reason for the deviation and correct the
error or switch off the faulty system
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 291

925 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 844 AviaExam12467 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

What datum is used for the Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) on a


non-precision approach when using the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite navigation
system?

Barometric altitude

If using Differential-GPS (D-GPS) the altitude obtained from the D-GPS,


otherwise barometric altitude

Radar altitude

GPS altitude

926 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 845 AviaExam12468 6/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is the datum for altitude information when conducting
flights under IFR conditions on airways using the NAVSTAR/GPS satellite
navigation system?

Barometric altitude

The average of GPS altitude and barometric altitude

GPS altitude

GPS altitude if 4 or more satellites are received otherwise barometric


altitude

927 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 846 AviaExam12469 7/17/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A course of 120°(T) is drawn between 'X' (61°30'N) and 'Y' (58°30'N) on a


Lambert Conformal conic chart with a scale of 1: 1 000 000 at 60°N.
The chart distance between 'X' and 'Y' is:

66.7 cm

33.4 cm

38.5 cm

36.0 cm
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 292

928 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 847 AviaExam12470 7/17/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Route 'A' (44°N 026°E) to 'B' (46°N 024°E) forms an angle of 35° with longitude
026°E. Variation at A is 3°E. What is the initial magnetic track from A to B?

322°

328°

032°

038°

929 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 848 AviaExam12475 7/17/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Direct Mercator chart with a scale of 1: 200 000 at equator;
Chart length from 'A' to 'B', in the vicinity of the equator, 11 cm.
What is the approximate distance from 'A' to 'B'?

12 NM

21 NM

22 NM

14 NM

930 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 849 AviaExam12476 7/17/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The Captain of an aircraft flying at FL100 wishes to obtain weather


information at the destination airfield (0ft) from the airfield's VOR. Assuming
ISA conditions, what is the approximate maximum theoretical range at which
it can be expected to obtain this information?

123 NM

123 km

12.3 NM

1230 km
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 293

931 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 850 AviaExam12478 7/17/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The BFO selector on an ADF receiver is used to:

hear the IDENT of some NDB stations radiating a continuous wave


signal

stop loop rotation

hear the IDENT and must always be switched ON

find the loop 'null' position

932 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 851 AviaExam12479 7/17/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An NDB transmits a signal pattern in the horizontal plane which is:

omnidirectional

bi-lobal circular

a cardioid balanced at 30 Hz

a beam rotating at 30 Hz

933 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 852 AviaExam12481 7/17/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

DME channels utilise frequencies of approximately:

1000 MHz

300 MHz

110 MHz

600 MHz

934 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 853 AviaExam12483 7/17/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

A VOR and DME are co-located.


You want to identify the DME by listening to the callsign.
Having heard the same callsign 4 times in 30 seconds the:

DME callsign is the one with the higher pitch that was broadcast only
once

DME callsign was not transmitted, the distance information is sufficient


proof of correct operation

DME callsign is the one with the lower pitch that was broadcast several
times

VOR and DME callsigns were the same and broadcast with the same
pitch
935 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 854 AviaExam12484 7/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The heading rose of an Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) is frozen on 200°.


Lined up on the ILS of runway 25, the localizer needle will be:

centred

left of centre

right of centre

centred with the 'fail' flag showing

936 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 855 AviaExam12485 7/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to radar systems that use pulse technology, the term 'Pulse
Recurrence Rate (PRR)' signifies the:

number of pulses per second

delay after which the process re-starts

the number of cycles per second

ratio of pulse period to pulse width

937 62.2.3.0.1 principles Typ: MC 856 AviaExam12487 7/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

The advantage of the use of slotted antennas in modern radar technology is


to:

virtually eliminate lateral lobes and as a consequence concentrate more


energy in the main beam

simultaneously transmit weather and mapping beams

have a wide beam and as a consequence better target detection

eliminate the need for azimuth slaving

938 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 857 AviaExam12488 7/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the maximum number of usable Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR)


transponder codes in Mode A?

4096

3600

1000

760
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 295

939 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 858 AviaExam12489 7/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following lists the phenomena least likely to be detected by


radar?

clear air turbulence

precipitation

turbulence in cloud that has precipitation

wet snow and turbulence in cloud that has precipitation

940 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 859 AviaExam12490 7/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
Aircraft heading 160°(M),
Aircraft is on radial 240° from a VOR,
Selected course on HSI is 250°.
The Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI) indications are deviation bar:

behind the aeroplane symbol with the FROM flag showing

behind the aeroplane symbol with the TO flag showing

ahead of the aeroplane symbol with the FROM flag showing

ahead of the aeroplane symbol with the TO flag showing

941 61.6.4 Flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 860 AviaExam12491 7/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft equipped with an Inertial Navigation System (INS) flies with INS 1
coupled with autopilot 1. Both inertial navigation systems are navigating from
way-point A to B. The inertial systems' Central Display Units (CDU) shows:
- XTK on INS 1 = 0
- XTK on INS 2 = 8L
(XTK = cross track)
From this information it can be deduced that:

at least one of the inertial navigation systems is drifting

only inertial navigation system No. 2 is drifting

only inertial navigation system No. 1 is drifting

the autopilot is unserviceable in NAV mode


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 296

942 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 861 AviaExam12549 11/18/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from CRK VOR/DME (N5150.4 W00829.7)
to position N5220 W00810?

030° - 33 NM

048° - 40 NM

014° - 33 NM

220° - 40 NM

943 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 862 AviaExam12550 11/18/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from CRK VOR/DME (N5150.4 W00829.7)
to position N5210 W00920?

311° - 38 NM

350° - 22 NM

295° - 38 NM

170° - 22 NM

944 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 863 AviaExam12551 11/18/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from CRK VOR/DME (N5150.4 W00829.7)
to position N5230 W00750?

039° - 48 NM

024° - 43 NM

023° - 48 NM

017° - 43 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 297

945 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 864 AviaExam12552 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from CRK VOR/DME (N5150.4 W00829.7)
to position N5140 W00730?

113° - 38 NM

104° - 76 NM

293° - 39 NM

106° - 38 NM

946 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 865 AviaExam12553 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1)
to position N5300 W00940?

309° - 33 NM

057° - 27 NM

293° - 33 NM

324° - 17 NM

947 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 866 AviaExam12554 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1)
to position N5310 W00830?

035° - 30 NM

070° - 58 NM

207° - 31 NM

019° - 31 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 298

948 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 867 AviaExam12555 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1)
to position N5220 W00810?

139° - 35 NM

129° - 46 NM

132° - 36 NM

212° - 26 NM

949 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 868 AviaExam12556 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1)
to position N5210 W00920?

214° - 37 NM

354° - 34 NM

198° - 37 NM

346° - 34 NM

950 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 869 AviaExam12557 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from CON VOR/DME (N5354.8 W00849.1)
to position N5430 W00900?

358° - 36 NM

214° - 26 NM

049° - 45 NM

169° - 35 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 299

951 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 870 AviaExam12558 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from CON VOR/DME (N5354.8 W00849.1)
to position N5400 W00800?

088° - 29 NM

320° - 8 NM

094° - 64 NM

260° - 30 NM

952 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 871 AviaExam12559 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from CON VOR/DME (N5354.8 W00849.1)
to position N5340 W00820?

140° - 23 NM

119° - 42 NM

311° - 22 NM

240° - 24 NM

953 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 872 AviaExam12560 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from CON VOR/DME (N5354.8 W00849.1)
to position N5330 W00930?

233° - 35 NM

165° - 27 NM

335° - 43 NM

025° - 38 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 300

954 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 873 AviaExam12561 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from BEL VOR/DME (N5439.7 W00613.8)
to position N5410 W00710?

236° - 44 NM

223° - 36 NM

320° - 44 NM

333° - 36 NM

955 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 874 AviaExam12562 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from BEL VOR/DME (N5439.7 W00613.8)
to position N5440 W00730?

278° - 44 NM

090° - 46 NM

278° - 10 NM

098° - 45 NM

956 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 875 AviaExam12563 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the radial and DME distance from BEL VOR/DME (N5439.7 W00613.8)
to position N5500 W00700?

315° - 34 NM

296° - 65 NM

126° - 33 NM

222° - 48 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 301

957 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 876 AviaExam12564 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°M) and distance between WTD NDB (N5211.3
W00705.0) and KER NDB (N5210.9 W00931.5)?

278° - 90 NM

090° - 91 NM

270° - 89 NM

098° - 90 NM

958 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 877 AviaExam12565 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°M) and distance between CRK VOR (N5150.4
W00829.7) and CRN NDB (N5318.1 W00856.5)?

357° - 89 NM

169° - 91 NM

349° - 90 NM

177° - 92 NM

959 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 878 AviaExam12566 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°M) and distance between CRN NDB (N5318.1
W00856.5) and WTD NDB (N5211.3 W00705.0)?

142° - 95 NM

315° - 94 NM

135° - 96 NM

322° - 95 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 302

960 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 879 AviaExam12567 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°M) and distance between WTD NDB (N5211.3
W00705.0) and BAL VOR (N5318.0 W00626.9)?

026° - 71 NM

018° - 153 NM

206° - 71 NM

198° - 72 NM

961 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 880 AviaExam12568 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°M) and distance between KER NDB (N5210.9
W00931.5) and CRN NDB (N5318.1 W00856.5)?

025° - 70 NM

197° - 71 NM

205° - 71 NM

017° - 70 NM

962 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 881 AviaExam12569 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°M) and distance between BAL VOR (N5318.0
W00626.9) and SLG NDB (N5416.7 W00836.0)?

316° - 96 NM

262° - 86 NM

128° - 99 NM

308° - 98 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 303

963 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 882 AviaExam12570 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°M) and distance between CRN NDB (N5318.1
W00856.5) and BEL VOR (N5439.7 W00613.8)?

058° - 128 NM

089° - 95 NM

229° - 125 NM

238° - 130 NM

964 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 883 AviaExam12571 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°T) and distance between CON VOR (N5354.8
W00849.1) and BEL VOR (N5439.7 W00613.8)?

063° - 101 NM

071° - 100 NM

113° - 97 NM

293° - 98 NM

965 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 884 AviaExam12572 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°T) and distance between SLG NDB (N5416.7
W00836.0) and CFN NDB (N5502.6 W00820.4)?

011° - 47 NM

020° - 46 NM

348° - 46 NM

191° - 45 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 304

966 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 885 AviaExam12573 11/19/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°T) and distance between WTD NDB (N5211.3
W00705.0) and FOY NDB (N5234.0 W00911.7)?

286° - 81 NM

294° - 80 NM

075° - 81 NM

277° - 83 NM

967 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 886 AviaExam12574 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°T) and distance between WTD NDB (N5211.3
W00705.0) and SLG NDB (N5416.7 W00836.0)?

336° - 137 NM

344° - 139 NM

156° - 136 NM

164° - 138 NM

968 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 887 AviaExam12575 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°T) and distance between SHA VOR (N5243.3
W00853.1) and CON VOR (N5354.8 W00849.1)?

002° - 72 NM

010° - 71 NM

358° - 72 NM

006° - 71 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 305

969 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 888 AviaExam12576 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°T) and distance between BAL VOR (N5318.0
W00626.9) and CRN NDB (N5318.1 W00856.5)?

270° - 90 NM

278° - 89 NM

268° - 91 NM

272° - 89 NM

970 61.3.3.0.1 plotting positions Typ: MC 889 AviaExam12577 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°T) and distance between BAL VOR (N5318.0
W00626.9) and CFN NDB (N5502.6 W00820.4)?

327° - 124 NM

335° - 128 NM

325° - 128 NM

320° - 127 NM

971 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 890 AviaExam12578 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What is the average track (°T) and distance between CRN NDB (N5318.1
W00856.5) and EKN NDB (N5423.6 W00738.7)?

035° - 80 NM

042° - 83 NM

031° - 81 NM

044° - 82 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 306

972 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 891 AviaExam12579 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 223°,
CRK VOR (N5150.4 W00829.7) radial 322°.
What is the aircraft position?

N5220 W00920

N5230 W00910

N5210 W00910

N5210 W00930

973 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 892 AviaExam12580 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 205°,
CRK VOR (N5150.4 W00829.7) radial 317°.
What is the aircraft position?

N5210 W00910

N5118 W00913

N5205 W00915

N5215 W00917

974 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 893 AviaExam12581 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 120°,
CRK VOR (N5150.4 W00829.7) radial 033°.
What is the aircraft position?

N5230 W00800

N5225 W00805

N5220 W00750

N5240 W00750
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 307

975 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 894 AviaExam12582 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 129°,
CRK VOR (N5150.4 W00829.7) radial 047°.
What is the aircraft position?

N5220 W00750

N5215 W00755

N5210 W00750

N5205 W00755

976 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 895 AviaExam12583 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 143°,
CRK VOR (N5150.4 W00829.7) radial 050°.
What is the aircraft position?

N5210 W00800

N5155 W00810

N5205 W00805

N5200 W00800

977 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 896 AviaExam12584 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 120°/35 NM.
What is the aircraft position?

N5230 W00800

N5300 W00945

N5225 W00805

N5250 W00950
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 308

978 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 897 AviaExam12585 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 165°/36 NM.
What is the aircraft position?

N5210 W00830

N5208 W00840

N5315 W00915

N5317 W00908

979 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 898 AviaExam12586 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 232°/32 NM.
What is the aircraft position?

N5220 W00930

N5305 W00815

N5228 W00935

N5303 W00810

980 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 899 AviaExam12587 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 025°/49 NM.
What is the aircraft position?

N5330 W00830

N5328 W00820

N5155 W00915

N5200 W0925
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 309

981 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 900 AviaExam12588 11/20/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1) radial 048°/22 NM.
What is the aircraft position?

N5300 W0830

N5258 W00825

N5225 W00917

N5228 W00920

982 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 901 AviaExam12589 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR N5243.3 W00853.1
CRK VOR N5150.4 W00829.7
Aircraft position N5220 W00910
Which of the following lists two radials that are applicable to the aircraft
position?

SHA 214°
CRK 330°

SHA 025°
CRK 141°

SHA 205°
CRK 321°

SHA 033°
CRK 149°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 310

983 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 902 AviaExam12590 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR N5243.3 W00853.1
CRK VOR N5150.4 W00829.7
Aircraft position N5230 W00820
Which of the following lists two radials that are applicable to the aircraft
position?

SHA 131°
CRK 017°

SHA 304°
CRK 189°

SHA 312°
CRK 197°

SHA 124°
CRK 009°

984 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 903 AviaExam12591 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR N5243.3 W00853.1
CRK VOR N5150.4 W00829.7
Aircraft position N5230 W00930
Which of the following lists two radials that are applicable to the aircraft
position?

SHA 248°
CRK 325°

SHA 068°
CRK 145°

SHA 060°
CRK 138°

SHA 240°
CRK 137°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 311

985 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 904 AviaExam12592 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR N5243.3 W00853.1
CON VOR N5354.8 W00849.1
Aircraft position N5330 W00800
Which of the following lists two radials that are applicable to the aircraft
position?

SHA 042°
CON 138°

SHA 213°
CON 310°

SHA 033°
CON 130°

SHA 221°
CON 318°

986 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 905 AviaExam12593 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR N5243.3 W00853.1
CON VOR N5354.8 W00849.1
Aircraft position N5320 W00950
Which of the following lists two radials that are applicable to the aircraft
position?

SHA 325°
CON 235°

SHA 137°
CON 046°

SHA 317°
CON 226°

SHA 145°
CON 055°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 312

987 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 906 AviaExam12594 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) DME 50 NM,
CRK VOR (N5150.4 W00829.7) DME 41 NM,
Aircraft heading 270°(M),
Both DME distances increasing.
What is the aircraft position?

N5200 W00935

N5215 W00940

N5215 W00745

N5235 W00750

988 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 907 AviaExam12595 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) DME 41 NM,
CRK VOR (N5150.4 W00829.7) DME 30 NM,
Aircraft heading 270°(M),
Both DME distances decreasing.
What is the aircraft position?

N5215 W00805

N5205 W00915

N5215 W00915

N5225 W00810
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 313

989 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 908 AviaExam12596 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
CRN VOR (N5318.1 W00856.5) DME 18 NM,
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) DME 30 NM,
Aircraft heading 270°(M),
Both DME distances decreasing.
What is the aircraft position?

N5310 W00830

N5252 W00923

N5307 W00923

N5355 W00825

990 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 909 AviaExam12597 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
CRN VOR (N5318.1 W00856.5) DME 34 NM,
SHA VOR (N5243.3 W00853.1) DME 26 NM,
Aircraft heading 090°(M),
Both DME distances increasing.
What is the aircraft position?

N5255 W00815

N5250 W0030

N5305 W00930

N5310 W00820
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 314

991 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 910 AviaExam12598 11/24/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
CON VOR (N5354.8 W00849.1) DME 30 NM,
CRN VOR (N5318.1 W00856.5) DME 25 NM,
Aircraft heading 270°(M),
Both DME distances decreasing.
What is the aircraft position?

N5330 W00820

N5343 W00925

N5335 W00925

N5337 W00820

992 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 911 AviaExam12599 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
CRK VOR/DME (N5150.4 W00829.7)
Kerry aerodrome (N5210.9 W00931.4)
What is the CRK radial and DME distance when overhead Kerry aerodrome?

307° - 43 NM

119° - 44 NM

127° - 45 NM

299° - 42 NM

993 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 912 AviaExam12600 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1)
Birr aerodrome (N5304 W00754)
What is the SHA radial and DME distance when overhead Birr aerodrome?

068° - 41 NM

248° - 42 NM

060° - 42 Nm

240° - 41 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 315

994 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 913 AviaExam12601 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
SHA VOR/DME (N5243.3 W00853.1)
Connemara aerodrome (N5314 W00928)
What is the SHA radial and DME distance when overhead Connemara
aerodrome?

333° - 37 NM

154° - 38 NM

326° - 37 NM

146° - 38 NM

995 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 914 AviaExam12602 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
CON VOR/DME (N5354.8 W00849.1)
Castlebar aerodrome (N5351 W00917)
What is the CON radial and DME distance when overhead Castlebar
aerodrome?

265° - 17 NM

077° - 18 NM

257° - 17 NM

086° - 18 NM

996 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 915 AviaExam12603 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Given:
CON VOR/DME (N5354.8 W00849.1)
Abbey Shrule aerodrome (N5335 W00739)
What is the CON radial and DME distance when overhead Abbey Shrule
aerodrome?

123° - 46 NM

116° - 47 NM

296° - 46 NM

304° - 47 NM
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 316

997 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 916 AviaExam12604 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What feature is shown on the chart at position N5211 W00931?

KERRY/Farranfore aerodrome

Waterford NDB

Connemara aerodrome

Punchestown aerodrome

998 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 917 AviaExam12605 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What feature is shown on the chart at position N5212 W00612?

TUSKAR ROCK LT.H. NDB

WTD NDB

KERRY/Farranfore aerodrome

Clonbullogue aerodrome

999 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 918 AviaExam12606 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What feature is shown on the chart at position N5311 W00637?

Punchestown aerodrome

Connemara aerodrome

KERRY/Farranfore aerodrome

Clonbullogue aerodrome

1000 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 919 AviaExam12607 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What feature is shown on the chart at position N5351 W00917?

Castlebar aerodrome

Connaught aerodrome

Connemara aerodrome

Brittas Bay aerodrome


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 317

1001 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 920 AviaExam12608 11/26/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
What feature is shown on the chart at position N5417 W01005?

EAGLE ISLAND LT.H. NDB

Belmullet aerodrome

Carnmore aerodrome

Clonbullogue aerodrome

1002 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 921 AviaExam12609 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Which of the following lists all the aeronautical chart symbols shown at
position N5150.4 W00829.7?

civil airport: VOR: DME: compulsory reporting point

civil airport: VOR: non-compulsory reporting point

VOR: DME: NDB:compulsory reporting point

VOR: DME: NDB: ILS

1003 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 922 AviaExam12610 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Which of the following lists all the aeronautical chart symbols shown at
position N5318.0 W00626.9?

military airport: VOR: DME

civil airport: VOR: DME

military airport: VOR: NDB

VOR: DME: danger area


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 318

1004 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 923 AviaExam12611 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Which of the following lists all the aeronautical chart symbols shown at
position N5416.7 W00836.0?

civil airport: NDB: DME: compulsory reporting point

VOR: DME: NDB: compulsory reporting point

civil airport: VOR: DME: non-compulsory reporting point

VOR: DME: NDB: non-compulsory reporting point

1005 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 924 AviaExam12612 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Which of the following lists all the aeronautical chart symbols shown at
position N5318.1 W00856.5?

civil airport: NDB: DME: non-compulsory reporting point

VOR: DME: NDB: compulsory reporting point

civil airport: VOR: DME: non-compulsory reporting point

VOR: DME: NDB: compulsory reporting point

1006 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 925 AviaExam12613 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-020.jpg
Which of the following lists all the aeronautical chart symbols shown at
position N5211 W00705?

civil airport: NDB; ILS

VOR: NDB

civil airport: ILS

NDB: ILS
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 319

1007 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 926 AviaExam12614 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-021.jpg
Which of the aeronautical chart symbols indicates a VOR/DME?

1008 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 927 AviaExam12615 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-021.jpg
Which of the aeronautical chart symbols indicates a DME?

1009 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 928 AviaExam12616 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-021.jpg
Which of the aeronautical chart symbols indicates a VOR?

1010 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 929 AviaExam12617 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-021.jpg
Which of the aeronautical chart symbols indicates an NDB?

3
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 320

1011 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 930 AviaExam12618 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-021.jpg
Which of the aeronautical chart symbols indicates a basic, non-specified,
navigation aid?

1012 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 931 AviaExam12619 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-021.jpg
Which of the aeronautical chart symbols indicates a TACAN?

1013 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 932 AviaExam12620 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-021.jpg
Which of the aeronautical chart symbols indicates a VORTAC?

6
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 321

1014 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 933 AviaExam12621 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a Flight Information Region (FIR)
boundary?

1015 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 934 AviaExam12623 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a Control Zone boundary?

1016 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 935 AviaExam12624 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates an uncontrolled route?

3
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 322

1017 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 936 AviaExam12625 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates the boundary of advisory
airspace?

1018 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 937 AviaExam12626 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a non-compulsory reporting point?

15

1019 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 938 AviaExam12627 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a compulsory reporting point?

15

6
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 323

1020 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 939 AviaExam12628 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a Way-point?

15

1021 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 940 AviaExam12629 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates an unlighted obstacle?

10

11

12

1022 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 941 AviaExam12630 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a lighted obstacle?

10

11

12

1023 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 942 AviaExam12631 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a group of unlighted obstacles?

11

12

13

9
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 324

1024 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 943 AviaExam12632 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a group of lighted obstacles?

12

10

11

1025 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 944 AviaExam12633 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates an exceptionally high unlighted
obstacle?

13

14

11

1026 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 945 AviaExam12634 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates an exceptionally high lighted
obstacle?

14

10

12

13
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 325

1027 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 946 AviaExam12635 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
What is the meaning of aeronautical chart symbol No. 15?

Aeronautical ground light

Visual reference point

Hazard to aerial navigation

Lighthouse

1028 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 947 AviaExam12636 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
What is the meaning of aeronautical chart symbol No. 16?

Lightship

Off-shore helicopter landing platform

Shipwreck showing above the surface at low tide

Off-shore lighthouse

1029 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 948 AviaExam12637 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates an aeronautical ground light?

15

16

10

14

1030 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 949 AviaExam12638 11/27/1998 Pkt.: 1.00

060-022.jpg
Which aeronautical chart symbol indicates a lightship?

16

10

12

14
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 326

1031 62.5.4 Types of area navigation system inputs Typ: MC 950 AviaExam12717 9/29/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following inputs to an Area Navigation System (R-NAV)


comes from an external, not on-board, system?

VOR/DME radial/distance

Magnetic heading

Inertial Navigation System (INS) position

Pressure altitude

1032 62.5.4 Types of area navigation system inputs Typ: MC 951 AviaExam12718 9/29/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following sensors/systems is self-contained?

Inertial Navigation System

GPS

Basic RNAV system

VOR/DME

1033 62.5.4 Types of area navigation system inputs Typ: MC 952 AviaExam12719 9/29/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to Area Navigation Systems (RNAV), which of the following is an Air


Data input?

True airspeed

Inertial Navigation System (INS) position

VOR/DME radial/distance

Doppler drift

1034 62.2.3 Airborne weather radar Typ: MC 953 AviaExam12720 9/29/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following equipments uses primary radar principles?

Airborne weather radar (AWR)

Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR)

Distance Measuring Equipment (DME)

Global Positioning System (GPS)


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 327

1035 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 954 AviaExam12721 9/29/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following equipments works on the interrogator/transponder


principle?

Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR)

Global Positioning System (GPS)

Airborne Weather Radar (AWR)

Aerodrome Surface Movement Radar

1036 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 955 AviaExam12722 9/29/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to indicate an emergency situation, the aircraft Secondary


Surveillance Radar (SSR) transponder should be set to:

7700

7600

7500

7000

1037 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 956 AviaExam12724 9/30/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

The theoretical maximum range for an Airborne Weather Radar is determined


by the:

pulse recurrence frequency

beamwidth

pulse length

carrier wave frequency

1038 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 957 AviaExam12729 10/5/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

The selection of code 7500 on an aircraft SSR transponder indicates:

unlawful interference with the planned operation of the flight

an emergency

transponder malfunction

radio communication failure


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 328

1039 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 958 AviaExam12730 10/5/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

The selection of code 7600 on an aircraft SSR transponder indicates:

radio communication failure

an emergency

unlawful interference with the planned operation of the flight

transponder malfunction

1040 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 959 AviaExam12731 10/5/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

The selection of code 7700 on an aircraft SSR transponder indicates:

an emergency

radio communication failure

transponder malfunction

unlawful interference with the planned operation of the flight

1041 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 960 AviaExam12732 10/5/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

In a primary radar using pulse technique, pulse length determines:

minimum measurable range

target discrimination

maximum measurable range

beam width

1042 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 961 AviaExam12733 10/5/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

In a primary radar using pulse technique, pulse recurrence frequency


(PRF)/pulse recurrence rate (PRR) determines:

maximum theoretical range

target discrimination

minimum range

beam width
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 329

1043 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 962 AviaExam12734 10/5/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

In a primary radar using pulse technique, the ability to discriminate between


targets in azimuth is a factor of:

beam width

aerial rotation rate

Pulse Recurrence Rate (PRR)

pulse length

1044 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 963 AviaExam12735 10/5/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following radar equipments operate by means of the pulse


technique?
1. Aerodrome Surface Movement Radar
2. Airborne Weather Radar
3. Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR)
4. Aerodrome Surveillance (approach) Radar

1, 2, 3 and 4

1, 2 and 4 only

2, 3 and 4 only

2 and 4 only

1045 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 964 AviaExam12736 10/5/1999 Pkt.: 1.00

On which of the following radar displays is it possible to get an indication of


the shape, and to some extent the type, of the aircraft generating the return?

Aerodrome Surface Movement Radar (ASMR)

Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR)

Aerodrome Surveillance (approach) Radar

Airborne Weather Radar (AWR)


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 330

1046 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 965 AviaExam12774 11/22/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

The purpose of the TAS input, from the air data computer, to the Inertial
Navigation System is for:

the calculation of wind velocity

position update in Attitude mode

position update in Navigation mode

the calculation of drift

1047 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 966 AviaExam12775 11/22/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

The full alignment of the stable platform of an Inertial Navigation System:

is only possible on the ground when the aircraft is at a complete stop

may be carried out during any phase of flight

may be carried out on the ground or when in straight and level flight

may be carried out at any time so long as an accurate position is


inserted into the system.

1048 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 967 AviaExam12776 11/22/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

After alignment of the stable platform of an Inertial Navigation System, the


output data from the platform is:

acceleration north/south and east/west, attitude and true heading

latitude, longitude and attitude

acceleration north/south and east/west and true heading

latitude, longitude and true heading

1049 61.6.2 Alignment procedures Typ: MC 968 AviaExam12777 11/22/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

After alignment of the stable platform of the Inertial Navigation System, the
output data from the INS computer to the platform is:

rate corrections to the gyros

accelerations from the accelerometers

attitude

latitude and longitude


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 331

1050 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 969 AviaExam12778 11/22/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

Inertial Reference System sensors include:

accelerometers, and laser gyros, mounted in the direction of the aircraft


axis

accelerometers mounted in the direction of the aircraft axis

laser gyros mounted in the direction of the aircraft axis

one east-west and one north-south gyro; one east-west and one
north-south accelerometer

1051 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 970 AviaExam12779 11/22/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

The data that needs to be inserted into an Inertial Reference System in order
to enable the system to make a successful alignment for navigation is:

aircraft position in latitude and longitude

aircraft heading

the position of an in-range DME

airport ICAO identifier

1052 61.6.1 Principles and practical application Typ: MC 971 AviaExam12780 11/22/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

In an Inertial Reference System, accelerations are measured in relation to:

aircraft axis

WGS 84 Earth co-ordinates

local vertical at the aircraft position

the direction of true north

1053 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 972 AviaExam12781 11/28/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Flight Management Computer (FMC) of the Flight Management System


(FMS), data relating to flight plans is stored in the:

navigation database

air data database

performance database

auto flight database


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 332

1054 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 973 AviaExam12782 11/28/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Flight Management Computer (FMC) of the Flight Management System


(FMS), data relating to V1, VR and V2 speeds is stored in the:

performance database

air data computer

navigation database

auto flight computer

1055 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 974 AviaExam12783 11/28/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Flight Management Computer (FMC) of the Flight Management System


(FMS), data relating to STARs and SIDs is stored in the:

navigation database

air data computer

performance database

auto flight computers

1056 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 975 AviaExam12784 11/28/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Flight Management Computer (FMC) of the Flight Management System


(FMS), data relating to aircraft flight envelope computations is stored in the:

performance database

air data computer

navigation database

auto flight computers

1057 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 976 AviaExam12785 11/28/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Flight Management Computer (FMC) of the Flight Management System


(FMS), data relating to waypoints is stored in the:

navigation database

air data computer

performance database

auto flight computers


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 333

1058 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 977 AviaExam12786 11/28/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Flight Management Computer (FMC) of the Flight Management System


(FMS), data relating to cruising speeds is stored in the:

performance database

air data computer

navigation database

auto flight computers

1059 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 978 AviaExam12791 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

Apart from radials and distances from VOR/DME stations, what information is
required by the VOR/DME Area Navigation computer in order to calculate the
wind?

Heading from the aircraft compass system and true airspeed from the air
data computer

True airspeed from the air data computer

Heading from the aircraft compass system

Vertical speed from the air data computer

1060 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 979 AviaExam12792 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

On what data is a VOR/DME Area Navigation system operating in the dead


reckoning mode?

TAS from the Air Data Computer; heading from the aircraft compass; the
last computed W/V.

TAS from the Air Data Computer; heading from the aircraft compass.

Radial from one VOR; distances from two DMEs.

Radial from one VOR; distances from two DMEs; TAS from the Air Data
computer; heading from the aircraft compass.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 334

1061 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 980 AviaExam12793 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

Under which of the following circumstances does a VOR/DME Area Navigation


system switch to Dead Reckoning mode?

VOR/DME Area Navigation computer is receiving neither radial nor


distance data information from VOR/DME stations.

VOR/DME Area Navigation computer is not receiving information from


the Air Data Computer.

VOR/DME Area Navigation computer is not receiving information from


the aircraft compass system.

When 'DR' is selected by the pilot.

1062 62.5.1 General philosophy Typ: MC 981 AviaExam12794 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

Under which of the following circumstances does a VOR/DME Area Navigation


system switch to Dead Reckoning mode?

The system is receiving information from only one VOR

The system is receiving information from one VOR and one DME

The system is receiving information from one VOR and two DMEs

The system is receiving information from the two DMEs

1063 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 982 AviaExam12797 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

How does a VOR/DME Area Navigation system obtain DME information?

The VOR/DME Area Navigation system has its own VHF NAV tuner and
the system itself tunes the DME stations providing the best angular
position lines.

the pilot tunes the closest VOR/DME stations within range on the
VOR/DME Area navigation control panel.

The VOR/DME Area Navigation system uses whatever stations are tuned
on the aircraft's normal VHF NAV selector.

The VOR/DME Area Navigation System has its own VHF NAV tuner and it
always tunes the DME stations closest to the aircraft position.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 335

1064 62.5.2 Typical flight deck equipment and operation Typ: MC 983 AviaExam12798 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following lists all the stages of flight when is it possible to
change the route in the active flight plan on an FMS equipped aircraft?

At any time before take-off and throughout the flight

Only before take-off

Only before the flight plan is activated

Only once the aircraft is airborne.

1065 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 984 AviaExam12799 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

What type of clock is used in NAVSTAR GPS satellites?

Atomic

Quartz

Mechanical

Laser

1066 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 985 AviaExam12800 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

How many satellites form the nominal NAVSTAR GPS constellation?

24

12

36

1067 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 986 AviaExam12801 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

How many clocks are installed in each NAVSTAR GPS satellite?

1
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 336

1068 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 987 AviaExam12802 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the inclination to the equatorial plane of the satellite's orbit in the
NAVSTAR GPS constellation?

55°

45°

35°

65°

1069 62.6.5 Satellite assisted navigation : Typ: MC 988 AviaExam12803 12/4/2000 Pkt.: 1.00

In what type of nominal orbit are NAVSTAR GPS satellites placed?

Circular

Elliptical

Geo-stationary

Pole to pole

1070 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 989 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying at FL150, with an outside air temperature of -30°, above an


airport where the elevation is 1660 ft and the QNH is 993 hPa. Calculate the
true altitude. (Assume 30 ft = 1 hPa)

13 660 ft

14 120 ft

17 160 ft

15 210 ft
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 337

1071 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 990 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft must fly 2000 ft above an obstacle of which the elevation is 13 600
ft. The QHN at the nearest airfield is 991 hPa, the elevation is 1500 ft and the
temperature is -20°C. Calculate the minimum altitude required.

17 300 ft

15 600 ft

14 080 ft

19 400 ft

1072 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 991 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

In 8 hours and 8 minutes the mean sun has moved how many degrees (°)
along the celestial equator?

122°

148°

18°

56°

1073 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 992 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

The great circle bearing of position B from position A in the Northern


Hemisphere is 040°. If the Conversion Angle is 4°, what is the great circle
bearing of A from B?

228°

212°

220°

224°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 338

1074 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 993 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

A great circle on the Earth running from the North Pole to the South Pole is
called:

a meridian.

a parallel of latitude.

a difference of longitude.

a longitude.

1075 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 994 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

How many small circles can be drawn between any two points on a sphere?

An unlimited number.

None.

One.

Two.

1076 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 995 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

How does the convergency of any two meridians on the Earth change with
varying latitude?

It changes as sine of latitude.

It changes as cosine of latitude.

It increases with decrease of latitude.

It is of constant value and does not change with latitude.

1077 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 996 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

In which occasions does the rhumb line track and the great circle track
coincide on the surface of the Earth?

On tracks directly North - South and on East - West tracks along the
Equator.

On high latitude tracks directly East - West.

On East - West tracks in the northern hemisphere north of the magnetic


equator.

On East - West tracks in polar areas.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 339

1078 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 997 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the rhumb line distance, in nautical miles, between two positions on
latitude 60°N, that are separated by 10° of longitude?

300 NM

520 NM

600 NM

866 NM

1079 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 998 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

The initial great circle track from A to B is 080° and the rhumb line track is
083°. What is the initial great circle track from B to A and in which Hemisphere
are the two positions located?

266° and in the northern hemisphere.

260° and in the southern hemisphere.

260° and in the northern hemisphere.

266° and in the southern hemisphere.

1080 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 999 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

If you are flying along a parallel of latitude, you are flying:

a rhumb line track.

on a north - south track.

on a track which is constantly changing direction.

a great circle track.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 340

1081 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 1000 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

In the Northern Hemisphere the rhumb line track from position A to B is 230°,
the covergency is 6° and the difference in longitude is 10°. What is the initial
rhumb line track from B to A?

050°

053°

056°

047°

1082 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 1001 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the length of one degree of longitude at latitude 60° South?

30 NM

52 NM

60 NM

90 NM

1083 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 1002 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

The distance along a meridian between 63°55'N and 13°47'S is:

4662 NM

7702 NM

5008 NM

3008 NM

1084 61.1.2 The earth Typ: MC 1003 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

When flying on a westerly great circle track in the Southern Hemisphere you
will:

experience an increase in the value of true track.

fly a spiral and finally end up at the south pole.

always have the rhumb line track between the departure point and the
destination to the left of your great circle track.

experience a decrease in the value of true track.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 341

1085 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 1004 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following alternatives is correct when you cross the international
date line?

The date will increase if you are crossing on a westerly heading.

The date will increase if you are crossing on a easterly heading.

The date will always be the same.

If you are crossing from westerly longitude to easterly longitude the date
will remain the same.

1086 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 1005 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

When the time is 2000 UTC, it is:

1400 LMT at 90° West.

2400 LMT at 120° West.

1200 LMT at 60° East.

0800 LMT at the Prime meridian.

1087 61.1.3 Time and time conversions Typ: MC 1006 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

When the time is 1400 LMT at 90° West, it is:

1200 LMT at 120° West.

1400 LMT at 90° East.

1000 LMT at 60° West.

0600 LMT at the Prime meridian.

1088 61.1.4 Directions Typ: MC 1007 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

If the Compass Heading is 265°, variation is 33° W and deviation is 3°E, what
is the True Heading?

235°

229°

301°

295°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 342

1089 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1008 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

How does the chart convergency change with latitude in a Lambert Conformal
projection?

It is constant and does not change with latitude.

It changes with cosine of latitude.

It increases with increase of latitude.

It changes with sine of latitude.

1090 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1009 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

On a Direct Mercator projection a particular chart length is measured at 30°N.


What earth distance will the same chart length be if measured at 60°N?

A smaller distance.

Twice the distance.

The same distance.

A larger distance.

1091 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1010 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Where on a Direct Mercator projection is the chart convergency correct


compared to the earth convergency?

At the equator.

At the two parallels of tangency.

At the poles.

All over the chart.

1092 61.3.2 The representation of meridians, parallels Typ: MC 1011 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

A rhumb line on a Direct Mercator chart appears as a:

straight line.

complex curve.

curve convex to the nearer pole.

small circle concave to the nearer pole.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 343

1093 61.3.3 The use of current aeronautical charts Typ: MC 1012 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

On a chart a straight line is drawn between two points and has a length of
4.63 cm. What is the chart scale if the line represents 150 NM?

1 : 6 000 000

1 : 1 000 000

1 : 3 000 000

1 : 5 000 000

1094 61.3.1 General properties of miscellaneous Typ: MC 1013 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

If the chart scale is 1 : 500 000, what earth distance would be represented by 7
cm on the chart?

35 000 m

3.5 km

35 NM

0.35 km

1095 61.4.5 Measurement of DR elements Typ: MC 1014 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Calibrated Airspeed (CAS) is Indicated Airspeed (IAS) corrected for:

instrument error and position error.

temperature and pressure error.

compressibility error.

density.

1096 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 1015 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Grid heading is 299°, grid convergency is 55° West and magnetic variation is
90° West. What is the corresponding magnetic heading?

084°

334°

154°

264°
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 344

1097 61.4.2 Use of the navigational computer Typ: MC 1016 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

An aircraft is flying at FL180 and the outside air temperature is -30°C. If the
CAS is 150 kt, what is the TAS?

195 kt

115 kt

180 kt

155 kt

1098 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 1017 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

True Heading of an aircraft is 265° and TAS is 290 kt. If W/V is 210°/35kt, what
is True Track and GS?

271° and 272kt

259° and 272kt

260° and 315kt

259° and 305kt

1099 61.4.3 The triangle of velocities, methods of solution fo Typ: MC 1018 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True Track 239°
True Heading 229°
TAS 555 kt
G/S 577 kt
Calculate the wind velocity.

130°/100kt

310°/100kt

300°/100kt

165°/100kt
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 345

1100 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 1019 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True Track 245°
Drift 5° right
Variation 3° E
Compass Hdg 242°
Calculate the Magnetic Heading.

237°

243°

247°

253°

1101 61.4.1 Basics of dead reckoning Typ: MC 1020 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Given:
True Track 245°
Drift 5° right
Variation 3° E
Compass Hdg 242°
Calculate the deviation.

5° W

1° E

5° E

11° E

1102 61.4.7 Measurements of: Typ: MC 1021 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

The distance between point of departure and destination is 340 NM and wind
velocity in the whole area is 100°/25kt. TAS is 140kt, True Track is 135° and
safe endurance 3 hr and 10 min. How long will it take to reach the Point of
Safe Return?

1 hr and 49 min

1 hr and 37 min

1 hr and 21 min

5 hr and 30 min
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 346

1103 62.1.1 Ground D/F Typ: MC 1022 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following affects VDF range?

The height of the transmitter and of the receiver.

Coastal refraction.

Sky wave propagation.

Strength of the pilot's voice when transmitting.

1104 62.1.1 Ground D/F Typ: MC 1023 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the "Q" code for a magnetic bearing from a VDF station?

"Request QDR".

"Request QNH".

"Request QTE".

"Request QDM".

1105 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 1024 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the range of a locator beacon?

10 - 25 NM

25 - 50 NM

50 - 100 NM

100 - 300 NM

1106 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 1025 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

In which frequency band(s) does a locator beacon normally transmit?

LF/MF

MF/HF

HF

HF/VHF
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 347

1107 62.1.2 ADF Typ: MC 1026 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is correct regarding the range of an NDB?

Aircraft height is not limiting for the reception of signals from the NDB.

The range is limited to the line of sight.

The range of an NDB will most likely increase at day time compared to
night time.

The transmitter power of the NDB station has no affect on the range.

1108 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 1027 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

In order to measure the radial from a VOR, the aircraft VOR receiver

measures the phase difference between the reference phase and the
variable phase of the signal.

measures the time difference between reception of the two signals


transmitted from the ground installation.

uses pulse technique to determine the radial.

measures the time difference between sending the interrogation signal


and receiving the transponder signal.

1109 62.1.3 VOR and Doppler-VOR Typ: MC 1028 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following errors is associated with the use of VOR?

Scalloping.

Coastal refraction.

Quadrantal error.

Night effect.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 348

1110 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 1029 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Regarding the DME system, which one of the following statements is true?

The transponder reply carrier frequency differs by 63 MHz from that of


the interrogation signal.

The DME measures the phase difference between the reference and
variable phase signals to calculate the distance.

DME operates in the VHF frequency band.

When passing overhead the DME station the DME will indicate 0.

1111 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 1030 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the statements below is correct regarding the DME?

The DME operating frequencies are in the UHF frequency band.

Two lines of position obtained from two different DME's give an


unambiguous fix.

The indicated distance is the ground distance measured from the


aircraft's projected position on the ground to the DME ground
installation.

The DME ground station is always co-located with a VOR station.

1112 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1031 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

What is measured in order to establish aircraft position in relation to the


localizer beam on an ILS?

The difference in depth between the 90Hz modulation and the 150Hz
modulation.

The difference in phase between the 90Hz modulation and the 150Hz
modulation.

The bearing to the localizer antenna found by means of a loop antenna.

The difference in time between the 90Hz modulation and the 150Hz
modulation.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 349

1113 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1032 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

What is regarded as the maximum safe deviation below the glide path during
ILS approach?

Half scale deflection.

One quarter scale deflection.

Three quarter scale deflection.

Full scale deflection.

1114 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1033 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which range facility associated with the ILS may be identified by a two-letter
identification group?

Locator.

Inner marker.

Outer marker.

Glide path.

1115 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1034 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Assuming a five dot display on either side of the ILS localiser cockpit display,
what is the angular displacement of the aircraft from the localiser centreline
when the CDI is deflected 2 dots to the right?

1.0° to the left.

2.0° to the left.

2.0° to the right.

1.0° to the right.


TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 350

1116 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1035 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

According to the ILS coverage area as defined, in which of the following


situations will the pilot be guaranteed a reliable signal from the localiser?

20NM from touchdown inbound and 8° displaced from the localiser


centreline.

27NM from touchdown inbound and 8° displaced from the localiser


centreline.

19NM from touchdown inbound and 13° displaced from the localiser
centreline.

10NM from touchdown inbound and 38° displaced from the localiser
centreline.

1117 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1036 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Full deflection on a glide slope indicator indicates that the aircraft is:

0.7° above or below the correct glide path.

2.5° above or below the correct glide path.

0.5° above or below the correct glide path.

1.25° above or below the correct glide path.

1118 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1037 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following is correct regarding false beams on a glide path?

False beams will only be found above the correct glide path.

False beams will only be found more than 10 degrees to the left or to the
right of the localiser centreline.

False beams are only present when flying a back-beam ILS approach.

False beams will only be found below the correct glide path.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 351

1119 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1038 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Full scale deflection of the localiser needle indicates that the aircraft is
approximately:

2.5° offset from the localiser centreline.

5° offset from the localiser centreline.

1.25° offset from the localiser centreline.

10° offset from the localiser centreline.

1120 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1039 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

On what carrier frequency does the inner marker transmit?

75 MHz.

Same frequency as the localizer.

Same frequency as the glide path.

3000 Hz.

1121 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1040 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

What is the audio frequency of the inner marker?

3000 Hz

1300 Hz

400 Hz

75 MHz

1122 62.1.5 ILS Typ: MC 1041 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which of the following alternatives is correct regarding audio- and visual


signals in cockpit when passing overhead a middle marker?

Audio: 1300 Hz, alternating dots and dashes. Visual: Amber light flashes.

Audio: 400 Hz, 2 dashes per second. Visual: Blue light flashes.

Audio: 75 MHz, 2 dashes per second. Visual: Blue light flashes.

Audio: 3000 Hz, alternating dots and dashes. Visual: Amber light flashes.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 352

1123 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 1042 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

In relation to primary radar, what does the term Pulse Recurrence Frequency
signify?

The number of pulses transmitted per second.

The number of revolutions performed by the radar antenna per minute.

The radar frequency used.

The time between each transmission of pulses.

1124 62.2.1 Pulse techniques and associated terms Typ: MC 1043 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

What information may be displayed on an ATC radar screen connected only to


a primary radar system?

Aircraft position only.

Aircraft position and SSR code.

Aircraft position, SSR code and altitude.

Aircraft altitude.

1125 62.2.2 Ground radar Typ: MC 1044 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Considering a primary radar system, what kind of aerials are used?

One directional antenna both for transmitting and for receiving.

A directional antenna for transmitting, and an omnidirectional antenna


for receiving.

One directional antenna for transmitting and one for receiving.

An omnidirectional antenna for transmitting, and a directional antenna


for receiving.
TM-Editor 25.04.2016
060-Navigation.LTM Seite 353

1126 62.2.4 SSR secondary surveillance radar and transp. Typ: MC 1045 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

Which one of the following is an advantage of a secondary radar system when


compared to a primary radar system?

The required power of transmission from the ground equipment is


reduced.

The relatively small ground antenna transmits no side lobes, thus


eliminating the danger of false replies from the airborne transponder.

Possibility of obtaining speed information for aircraft within range.

Is not limited to line of sight.

1127 62.1.4 DME Typ: MC 1046 11/23/2003 Pkt.: 1.00

The indicated range from a DME station is:

slant range.

ground range.

0 when passing overhead the station.

ground range only if the beacon is co-located with VOR.

© LPLUS GmbH 2007

You might also like